1
高中英语语法大全
词法
第1 章 主谓一致
一.概念:
主谓一致是指：
1） 语法形式上要一致，即单复数形式与谓语要一致。
2） 意义上要一致，即主语意义上单复数要与谓语的单复数形式一致。
3） 就近原则，即谓语动词单复形式取决于最靠近它的词语，
一般来说，不可数名词用动词单数，可数名词复数用动词复数。例如：
There is much water in the thermos.
但当不可数名词前有表示数量的复数名词时，谓语动词用复数形式。例如：
Ten thousand tons of coal were produced last year.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.并列结构作主语时谓语用复数，例如：
Reading and writing are very important. 读写很重要。
注意：当主语由and 连结时，如果它表示一个单一的概念，即指同一人或同一物时，谓
语动词用单数，and 此时连接的两个词前只有一个冠词。例如：
The iron and steel industry is very important to our life. 钢铁工业对我们的
生活有重要意义。
典型例题
The League secretary and monitor ___ asked to make a speech at the meeting.
A. is B. was C. are D. were
答案B. 注： 先从时态上考虑。这是过去发生事情应用过去时，先排除A.，C。本
题易误选D，因为The League secretary and monitor 好象是两个人，但仔细辨别，monitor
前没有the，在英语中，当一人兼数职时只在第一个职务前加定冠词。后面职务用and 相连。
这样本题主语为一个人，所以应选B。
2. 主谓一致中的靠近原则
1)当there be 句型的主语是一系列事物时，谓语应与最邻近的主语保持一致。例如：
There is a pen, a knife and several books on the desk. 桌上有一支笔、一把小刀
和几本书。
There are twenty boy-students and twenty-three girl-students in the class.班上
有二十个男孩，二十三个女孩。
2）当either… or… 与neither… nor，连接两个主语时，谓语动词与最邻近的主语保持
一致。如果句子是由here, there 引导，而主语又不止一个时，谓语通常也和最邻近的主语
一致。例如：
Either you or she is to go. 不是你去，就是她去。
Here is a pen, a few envelops and some paper for you. 给你笔、信封和纸。
3.谓语动词与前面的主语一致
2
当主语有with, together with, like, except, but, no less than, as well as 等词组
成的短语时，谓语动词与前面的主语部分一致。例如：
The teacher together with some students is visiting the factory. 教师和一些
学生在参观工厂。
He as well as I wants to go boating.他和我想去划船。
4. 谓语需用单数的情况
1）代词each 以及由every, some, no, any 等构成的复合代词作主语时，或主语中含有
each, every 时, 谓语需用单数。例如：
Each of us has a tape-recorder. 我们每人都有录音机。
There is something wrong with my watch. 我的表坏了。
2）当主语是一本书或一条格言时，谓语动词常用单数。例如：
The Arabian Night is a book known to lovers of English. 《天方夜谭》是英语
爱好者熟悉的一本书。
3）表示金钱，时间，价格或度量衡的复合名词作主语时，通常把这些名词看作一个整体，
谓语一般用单数。例如：
Three weeks was allowed for making the necessary preparations. 用三个星期来
做准备。
Ten yuan is enough. 十元够了。
5.指代意义决定谓语的单复数
1）代词what, which, who, none, some, any, more, most, all 等词的单复数由其指代
的词的单复数决定。例如：
All is right. 一切顺利。
All are present. 人都到齐了。
2）集体名词作主语时，谓语的数要根据主语的意思来决定。如family, audience, crew,
crowd, class, company, committee 等词后，谓语动词用复数形式时强调这个集体中各
个成员，用单数时强调该集体的整体。例如：
His family isn't very large. 他家成员不多。
His family are music lovers. 他家个个都是音乐爱好者。
但集合名词people, police, cattle, poultry 等在任何情况下都用复数形式。例如：
Are there any police around? 附近有警察吗？
3）有些名词，如variety, number, population, proportion, majority 等有时看作单数，
有时看作复数。例如：
A number of +名词复数+复数动词。
The number of +名词复数+单数动词。
A number of books have lent out.
The majority of the students like English.
6.与后接名词或代词保持一致的情况
1）用half of, most of, none of, heaps of, lots of, plenty of 等引起主语时，谓语
动词通常与of 后面的名词/代词保持一致。例如：
Most of his money is spent on books. 他大部分钱化在书上了。
Most of the students are taking an active part in sports. 大部分学生积极参
与体育运动。
2）用a portion of, a series of, a pile of, a panel of 等引起主语时，谓语动词通
常用单数。例如： A series of accidents has been reported. 媒体报道了一连串的事故。
3
A pile of lots was set beside the hearth. 炉边有一堆木柴。
3）如 many a 或 more than one 所修饰的短语作主语时，谓语动词多用单数形式。但由
more than… of 作主语时，动词应与其后的名词或代词保持一致。例如：
Many a person has read the novel. 许多人读过这本书。
More than 60 percent of the students are from the city.百分之六十多的学生来
自这个城市。
三.巩固练习
（ ） 1. The number of people invited ______ fifty, but a number of them
_______ absent for different reasons.
A. were, was B. was, was
C. was, were D. were, were
（ ） 2. E-mail, as well as telephones, ________ an important part in daily
communication.
A. is playing B. have played
C. are playing D. play
（ ） 3. ______ of the land in that district ______ covered with trees and
grass.
A. Two fifth, is B. Two fifth, are
C. Two fifths, is D. Two fifths, are
（ ） 4. Ten minutes ______ a long time for one who waits.
A. seem B. seems
C. seemed D. are seemed
（ ） 5. Eric is the only one of the boys who _____ a driving license.
A. has B. have
C. is having D. are having’
（ ） 6. Joy and Sorrow _____ next-door neighbours.
A. is B. are C. were D. be
（ ）7. In my opinion, some of the news _____ unbelievable.
A. are B. is C. has been D. have been
（ ）8. When ______ the United Nations founded?
A. is B. are C. was D. were
（ ）9. Every possible means _____ .
A. has tried B. has been tried
C. was tried D. were tried
（ ） 10. What she says and does _____ nothing to do with me.
A. was B. were C. has D. have
（ ）11. There _____ a dictionary and several books on the desk.
A. are B. must C. have been D. is
（ ）12. Nobody ______ seen the film. It’s a pity.
A. but Tom and Jack have B. except Tom and Jack have
C. but my friends has D. but I have
（ ）13. No teacher and no student ______．
A. are admitted B. is admitted
4
C. are admitting D. is admitting
（ ）14. All but one ______ here just now.
A. is B. was C. has been D. were
（ ）15. When and where to build the new factory _____ yet.
A. is not decided B. are not decided
C. has not decided D. have not decided
（ ） 16. The writer and singer ______ here.
A. is B. are C. were D. do
（ ） 17. As I have a meeting at four, ten minutes _____ all that I can spare
to talk with you.
A. are B. was C. is D. were
（ ） 18. In those days John with his classmates _____ kept busy preparing for
the exam.
A. is B. are
C. was D. were
（ ） 19. —— ____ your clothes?
——No, mine _____ hanging over there.
A. Is it, is B. Are these, are
C. Is it, are D. Are these, is
（ ） 20. The Smith’s family, which ____ rather a large one, ____ very fond
of their old houses.
A. were, were B. was, was
C. were, was D. was, were
（ ） 21. What the teacher and the students want to say _____ that either of the
countries ____ beautiful.
A. are, are B. is, is
C. are, is D. is, are
（ ） 22. He is the only one of the students who _____ a winner of scholarship
for three years.
A. is B. are
C. have been D. has been
（ ） 23. _____ of my brothers are reporters. Covering events, meetings, or
sports meetings ______ their duty.
A. Each, are B. Both, is
C. Neither, are D. None, is
（ ） 24. —— What do you think of the ______ of the coat?
—— It’s rather high. You can buy a cheaper one in that shop.
A. value B. cost C. price D. use
（ ） 25. —— Are the two answers correct?
—— No, ______ correct.
A. no one is B. both are not
C. neither is D. either is not
（ ） 26. The wind, together with rain and fog, _____ making sailing difficult.
A. have been B. was
5
C. / D/ are
四.答案
1.C 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. B 8. C 9. B 10. C 11. D 12.
C 13. B 14. D 15. A 16. A 17. C 18. C 19. B 20. D 21. B 22. D 23.
B 24. C 25. C 26. B
第2 章 动词的时态
一. 概念:
时态是英语谓语动词的一种形式,表示动作发生的时间和所处的状态.英语中的时态是
通过动词形式本身的变化来实现的.英语有16 种时态,但中学阶段较常用有十种:一般现
在时,一般过去时,一般将来时,过去将来时,现在进行时,过去进行时,将来进行时,过去
完成时,英在完成时和现在完成进行时.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.一般现在时的用法
1） 经常性或习惯性的动作，常与表示频腮度的时间状语连用。时间状语： every…,
sometimes, at…, on Sunday。例如：
I leave home for school at 7 every morning. 每天早上我七点离开家。
2） 客观真理，客观存在，科学事实。例如：
The earth moves around the sun. 地球绕太阳转动。
Shanghai lies in the east of China. 上海位于中国东部。
3） 表示格言或警句。例如：
Pride goes before a fall. 骄者必败。
注意：此用法如果出现在宾语从句中，即使主句是过去时，从句谓语也要用一般现在
时。
例：Columbus proved that the earth is round. 哥伦布证实了地球是圆的。
4） 现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。例如：
I don't want so much. 我不要那么多。
Ann writes good English but does not speak well. 安英语写得不错，讲的可不行。
比较：Now I put the sugar in the cup. 把糖放入杯子。
I am doing my homework now. 我正在做功课。
第一句用一般现在时，用于操作演示或指导说明的示范性动作，表示言行的瞬间动作。
第二句中的now 是进行时的标志，表示正在进行的动作的客观状况，所以后句用一般现
在时。
2. 一般过去时的用法
1）在确定的过去时间里所发生的动作或存在的状态。例如：时间状语有：yesterday, last
week, an hour ago, the other day, in 1982 等。例如：
Where did you go just now? 刚才你上哪儿去了？
2）表示在过去一段时间内，经常性或习惯性的动作。例如：
When I was a child, I often played football in the street. 我是个孩子的时候，
常在马路上踢足球。
Whenever the Browns went during their visit, they were given a warm welcome.
那时，布朗一家无论什么时候去，都受到热烈欢迎。
3）句型：It is time for sb. to do sth "到……时间了" "该……了"。例如：
6
It is time for you to go to bed. 你该睡觉了。
It is time that sb. did sth. "时间已迟了" "早该……了" ，例如It is
time you went to bed. 你早该睡觉了。
would （had） rather sb. did sth. 表示'宁愿某人做某事'。例如：I'd
rather you came tomorrow.还是明天来吧。
4） wish, wonder, think, hope 等用过去时，作试探性的询问、请求、建议等，而一般过
去时表示的动作或状态都已成为过去，现已不复存在。例如：I thought you might have some.
我以为你想要一些。
比较：Christine was an invalid all her life.（含义：她已不在人间。）
Christine has been an invalid all her life.（含义：她现在还活着）
Mrs. Darby lived in Kentucky for seven years. （含义：达比太太已不再住
在肯塔基州。）
Mrs. Darby has lived in Kentucky for seven years. （含义：现在还住在肯
塔基州，有可能指刚离去）
注意： 用过去时表示现在，表示委婉语气。
1）动词want, hope, wonder, think, intend 等。例如：
Did you want anything else? 您还要些什么吗？
I wondered if you could help me. 能不能帮我一下。
2）情态动词 could, would。例如：
Could you lend me your bike? 你的自行车，能借用一些吗？
3.一般将来时
1） shall 用于第一人称，常被will 所代替。will 在陈述句中用于各人称，在征求意
见时常用于第二人称。例如：
Which paragraph shall I read first？ 我先读哪一段呢？
Will you be at home at seven this evening? 今晚七点回家好吗？
2） be going to +不定式，表示将来。
a. 主语的意图，即将做某事。例如：What are you going to do tomorrow? 明天打
算作什么呢？
b. 计划，安排要发生的事。例如：The play is going to be produced next month。
这出戏下月开播。
c. 有迹象要发生的事。例如：Look at the dark clouds, there is going to be a
storm. 看那乌云，快要下雨了。
3） be +不定式表将来，按计划或正式安排将发生的事。例如：
We are to discuss the report next Saturday.我们下星期六讨论这份报告。
4） be about to +不定式，意为马上做某事。例如：
He is about to leave for Beijing. 他马上要去北京。
注意：be about to do 不能与tomorrow, next week 等表示明确将来时的时间状语连
用。
4. 一般现在时表将来
1）下列动词come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return 的一般现在时可以表示将
来，主要用来表示在时间上已确定或安排好的事情。例如：
The train leaves at six tomorrow morning. 火车明天上午六点开。
When does the bus star? It stars in ten minutes. 汽车什么时候开？十分钟后。
2）以here, there 等开始的倒装句，表示动作正在进行。例如：
7
Here comes the bus. = The bus is coming. 车来了。
There goes the bell. = The bell is ringing. 铃响了。
3）在时间或条件句中。例如：
When Bill comes （不是will come）, ask him to wait for me. 比尔来后，让
他等我。
I'll write to you as soon as I arrive there. 我到了那里，就写信给你。
4）在动词hope, take care that, make sure that 等的宾语从句中。例如：
I hope they have a nice time next week. 我希望他们下星期玩得开心。
Make sure that the windows are closed before you leave the room. 离开房间
前，务必把窗户关了。
5. 用现在进行时表示将来
下列动词come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return 等现在进行时可以表示将
来。例如：
I'm leaving tomorrow. 明天我要走了。
Are you staying here till next week? 你会在这儿呆到下周吗？
6. 现在完成时
现在完成时用来表示之前已发生或完成的动作或状态，其结果的影响现在还存在；也可
表示持续到现在的动作或状态。其构成：have （has） +过去分词。
7. 比较一般过去时与现在完成时
1）一般过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情，强调动作；现在完成时为
过去发生的，强调过去的事情对现在影响，强调是影响。
2）一般过去时常与具体的时间状语连用，而现在完成时通常与模糊的时间状语连用，
或无时间状语。
一般过去时的时间状语：yesterday, last week，…ago, in1980, in October, just
now 等，皆为具体的时间状语。
现在完成时的时间状语：for, since, so far, ever, never, just, yet, till/until, up
to now, in past years, always 等，皆不确定的时间状语。
共同的时间状语：this morning, tonight, this April, now, already, recently,
lately 等。
3）现在完成时可表示持续到现在的动作或状态，动词一般是延续性的，如live, teach,
learn, work, study, know.。
一般过去时常用的非持续性动词有come, go, leave, start, die, finish, become,
get married 等。例如：
I saw this film yesterday. （强调看的动作发生过了）
I have seen this film. （强调对现在的影响，电影的内容已经知道了）
Why did you get up so early? （强调起床的动作已发生过了）
Who hasn't handed in his paper? （强调有卷子未交，疑为不公平竞争）
He has been in the League for three years. （在团内的状态可延续）
He has been a League member for three years. （是团员的状态可持续）
句子中如有过去时的时间副词（如yesterday, last, week, in 1960）时，不能使
用现在完成时，要用过去时。
（错）Tom has written a letter to his parents last night.
（对）Tom wrote a letter to his parents last night.
8. 用于现在完成时的句型
8
1）It is the first / second time.... that…结构中的从句部分，用现在完成时。例
如：
It is the first time that I have visited the city. 这是我第一次访问这城市。
This is the first time （that） I've heard him sing. 这是我第一次听他唱歌。
注意：It was the third time that the boy had been late.
2）This is +形容词最高级+that…结构，that 从句要用现在完成时。例如：
This is the best film that I've （ever） seen. 这是我看过的最好的电影。
9.过去完成时
1） 概念：表示过去的过去
----|----------|--------|----> 其构成是had +过去分词构成。
那时以前 那时 现在
2） 用法
a. 在told, said, knew, heard, thought 等动词后的宾语从句。例如：
She said （that）she had never been to Paris. 她告诉我她曾去过巴黎。
b. 状语从句
在过去不同时间发生的两个动作中，发生在先，用过去完成时；发生在后，用一般
过去时。例如：
When the police arrived, the thieves had run away. 警察到达时，小偷们早
就跑了。
c. 表示意向的动词，如hope, wish, expect, think, intend, mean, suppose 等，
用过去完成时表示"原本…，未能…"。例如：
We had hoped that you would come, but you didn't. 那时我们希望你能来，但
是你没有来。
3） 过去完成时的时间状语before, by, until , when, after, once, as soon as。
例如：
He said that he had learned some English before. 他说过他以前学过一些英
语。
By the time he was twelve, Edison had began to make a living by himself.
到了十二岁那年，爱迪生开始自己谋生。
Tom was disappointed that most of the guests had left when he arrived at
the party.
汤姆失望了，因为他到达晚会时，大部分客人已经走了。
10. 用一般过去时代替过去完成时
1） 两个动作如按顺序发生，又不强调先后，或用then，and，but 等连词时，多用一
般过去时。例如：
When she saw the mouse，she screamed. 她看到老鼠，就叫了起来。
My aunt gave me a hat and I lost it. 姑妈给了我一顶帽子，我把它丢了。
2 ） 两个动作相继发生，可用一般过去时；如第一个动作需要若干时间完成，用过去完
成时。例如：
When I heard the news, I was very excited.
3） 叙述历史事实，可不用过去完成时，而只用一般过去时。例如：
Our teacher told us that Columbus discovered America in 1492.
11.将来完成时
1） 构成will have done
9
2） 概念
a. 状态完成：表示某事继续到将来某一时为止一直有的状态。例如：
They will have been married for 20 years by then. 到那时他们结婚将有二十年了。
b. 动作完成：表示将来某一时或另一个将来的动作之前，已经完成的动作或获得的经
验。例如：
You will have reached Shanghai by this time tomorrow. 明天此时，你已经到达
上海了
12 现在进行时
现在进行时的基本用法：
a. 表示现在（指说话人说话时）正在发生的事情。例如：
We are waiting for you. 我们正在等你。
b. 习惯进行：表示长期的或重复性的动作，说话时动作未必正在进行。例如：
Mr. Green is writing another novel. 他在写另一部小说。（说话时并未在写，
只处于写作的状态。）
c. 表示渐变，这样的动词有：get, grow, become, turn, run, go, begin 等。例如：
The leaves are turning red. 叶子在变红。
It's getting warmer and warmer. 天越来越热了。
d. 与always, constantly, forever 等词连用，表示反复发生的动作或持续存在的状
态，往往带有说话人的主观色彩。例如：
You are always changing your mind. 你老是改变主意。
13. 过去进行时
1）概念：表示过去某时正在进行的状态或动作。
2）过去进行时的主要用法是描述一件事发生的背景；一个长动作延续的时候，另一个短
动作发生。
3） 常用的时间状语有this morning, the whole morning, all day yesterday, from nine
to ten last evening, when, while 等。例如：
My brother fell while he was riding his bicycle and hurt himself. 我兄弟
骑车时摔了下来，受了伤。
It was raining when they left the station. 他们离开车站时，正下着雨。
When I got to the top of the mountain, the sun was shining. 我到达山顶时，
阳光灿烂。
14. 将来进行时
1） 概念：表示将来某时进行的状态或动作，或按预测将来会发生的事情。例如：
She'll be coming soon. 她会很快来的。
I'll be meeting him sometime in the future. 将来我一定去见他。
注意：将来进行时不用于表示"意志"，不能说 I'll be having a talk with her.
2）常用的时间状语有soon, tomorrow, this evening，on Sunday, by this time，tomorrow,
in two days, tomorrow evening 等。例如：By this time tomorrow, I'll be lying
on the beach. 明天此时，我正躺在海滩上呢。
15. 一般现在时代替一般将来时
When, while, before, after, till, once, as soon as, so long as, by the time, if,
in case （that）, unless, even if, whether, the moment, the minute, the day, the
year, immediately 等引导的时间状语从句，条件句中，用一般现在时代替将来时。例如：
He is going to visit her aunt the day he arrives in Beijing. 他一到北京，就
10
去看他姨妈。
16. 一般现在时代替一般过去时
1 ） "书上说"，"报纸上说"等。例如：
The newspaper says that it's going to be cold tomorrow. 报纸上说明天会很冷
的。
2） 叙述往事，使其生动。例如：
Napoleon's army now advances and the great battle begins.拿破仑的军队正在
向前挺进，大战开始了
17. 一般现在时代替现在完成时
1） 有些动词用一般现在时代替完成时，如hear, tell, learn, write , understand,
forget, know, find , say, remember 等。例如：
I hear （= have heard） he will go to London. 我听说了他将去伦敦。
I forget （=have forgotten） how old he is. 我忘了他多大了。
2） 用句型 " It is … since…"代替"It has been … since …"。例如：
It is （= has been） five years since we last met. 从我们上次见面以来，五年
过去了。
18. 一般现在时代替现在进行时。
在Here comes…/There goes…等句型里，用一般现在时代替现在进行时。例如：
There goes the bell. 铃响了。
19. 现在进行时代替将来时
1） 表示即将发生的或预定中计划好的活动。例如：
Are you staying with us this weekend? 和我们一起度周末好吗?
We are leaving soon. 我们马上就走。
2） 渐变动词，如get, run, grow, become, begin 以及瞬间动词die 等。例如：
He is dying. 他要死了。
20.时态一致
1） 如果从句所叙述的为真理或相对不变的事实，则用现在时。例如：
At that time, people did not know that the earth moves. 那时，人们不知道地球
是动的。
He told me last week that he is eighteen. 上星期他告诉我他十八岁了。
2） 宾语从句中的，助动词ought, need, must, dare 的时态是不变的。例如：
He thought that I need not tell you the truth. 他认为我不必告诉你真相。
三.巩固练习:
1、I’ ll give the book to him as soon as he ________ back.
2、Has the baby ________ crying yet? (stop)
3、I don’ t know whether Mother __________ me to Beijing next month.(take)
4、She _______ on her coat and went out. (put)
5、 “What are they doing?” “They __________ ready for the sports meeting.”
(get)
6、The boy asked his mother ________him go and play basketball.(let)
7、I’m sorry to keep you ____________ for a long time. (wait)
11
8、It ________ (take) him half an hour _______ (finish) his homework yesterday.
9、If it ________ an interesting film, we’ll see it tomorrow. (be)
10、They usually ________ (do) their homework after supper.
11、Listen! Who _____________(sing) in the next room now?
12、__________(be) your parents in Shanghai last year?
13、Mr. Yu _____________(teach) us maths since 1982.
14、They will have a trip to the Great Wall if it _________ (not rain) tomorrow.
15、Li Ming often _________ (listen) to the radio in the morning.
16、A: “Father, may I go out and play football?” B: “_____you ____(do) your
homework?”
17 、All the people in the town are glad ______(hear) that a famous
musician ___ a concert this Saturday evening.( give)
18、Our teacher told us if it _____(not snow) we would visit the Science Museum the
next day.
19、They often _______ (play) football in the afternoon.
20、A: What’re you doing Dad? B: I _______ (mend) the radio.
21、Let’s _______(carry) the boxes to the house.
22、Yesterday she ______ (want) very much to see the film, but she couldn’
t __(get) a ticket.
23、I _________(write) to you as soon as I get to Shanghai.
24、Mike ___________(visit) several places since he came to Beijing.
25、He ___________ (write) four letters to his wife every month.
26、Don’ t make any noise, Grandma ___________ (sleep).
27、His aunt ___________ (do) some cooking when he came in .
28、When they ___________ (reach) the station, the train had already left.
29、There ___________ (be) a meeting next Monday.
30、We ___________ (know) each other since our boyhood..
31、Sometimes my father ___________ (come) back home late.
32、They ___________ (have) an English evening next week.
33、I’m very glad___________ (hear) that.
12
34、Wei Fang isn’t here. She ___________ (go) to the reading-room.
35、The story ___________ (happen) long ago.
36、They ___________ (visit) the History Museum last week.
37、Zhang Hong ___________ (make) many friends since she came to Paris.
38、She ___________ (go) to the cinema with her classmates tomorrow evening.
39、Stay here, bag. Don’t go out. It ___________(rain) now.
40、Li Ping___________ (write) a composition every week.
41、The scientist ___________ (give) us a talk yesterday.
42、My parents ___________ (live) in Beijing since 1949.
43、Look! The young worker___________ (show) the students around the factory now.
44、They ___________ (build) a new bridge over the river next year.
45、The students___________ (clean) their classroom tomorrow.
46、The windows of our lab ___________ (clean) once a week.
47、Our teacher ___________ (join) the party twenty years ago.
48、The boys___________ (have) a basketball match now. Let’s ___(go) and _____(watch).
49、She___________ (work) in this factory for ten years.
50、 “What makes you ___________ (think) I’m a farmer?” the Frenchman asked.
四.答案
1. comes
2. stopped
3. will take
4. put
5. are getting
6. to let
7. waiting
8. took … to finish
9. is
10. do
11. is singing
12. Was
13. has taught
14. doesn’t rain
15. listens
16. Have … done
17. to hear … will give
18. didn’t snow
19. play
20. am mending
21. carry
22. wanted , get
23. will write
24. has visited
25. writes
26. is sleeping
27. was doing
28. reached
29. will be
30. have known
31. comes
32. will have
33. to hear
34. has gone
35. happened
36. visited
37. has made
38. will go
39. is raining
40. writes
41. gave
42. have lived
43. is showing
44. will build
45. will clean
46. is cleaned
47. joined
48. are having, go …
watch
49. has worked
think
13
14
第三章 动词的语态
一.概念:
动词的语态是动词的一种形式,表示主语和谓语之间语法或语义的关系.英语的语态有两
种:主动语态和被动语态.主动语态用于主动句,表示主语是动作的执行者.被动语态用于被
动句,表示主语是动作的承受者.主动语态的构成方式与动词时态相同,而被动语态由 助动
词be+过去分词 构成,有人称,数,时态的变化.
二. 相关知识点精讲
1. let 的用法
1）当let 后只有一个单音节动词，变被动语态时，可用不带to 的不定式。例如：
They let the strange go.他们放陌生人走了。
---> The strange was let go.
2）当let 后宾补较长时，let 通常不用被动语态，而用allow 或permit 代替。例如：
The nurse let me go to see my classmate in the hospital. 那护士让我去探望住
院的同学。
----> I was allowed / permitted to see my classmate in the hospital.
2.短语动词的被动语态
短语动词是一个整体，不可丢掉后面的介词或副词。例如：
My sister will be taken care of by Grandma. 我妹妹由奶奶照顾。
Such a thing has never been heard of before. 这样的事闻所未闻。
3. 表示"据说"或"相信" 的词组，基本上由believe, consider, declare, expect, feel ,
report, say, see, suppose, think, understand 等组成。例如：
It is said that… 据说
It is reported that… 据报道
It is believed that… 大家相信
It is hoped that… 大家希望
It is well known that… 众所周知
It is thought that… 大家认为
It is suggested that… 据建议
It is taken granted that… 被视为当然
It has been decided that… 大家决定
It must be remember that… 务必记住的是
4. 不用被动语态的情况
1） 不及物动词或不及物动词短语，如appear, die disappear, end（vi. 结束）, fail,
happen, last, lie, remain, sit, spread, stand, break out, come true, fall asleep,
keep silence, lose heart, take place 等没有无被动语态。例如：
After the fire, very little remained of my house. 大火过后，我家烧得所剩无几。
比较：rise, fall, happen 是不及物动词；raise, seat 是及物动词。
要想正确地使用被动语态，就须注意哪些动词是及物的，哪些是不及物的。特别是一词
多义的动词往往有两种用法。解决这一问题唯有在学习过程中多留意积累。
2） 不能用于被动语态的及物动词或动词短语，如fit, have, hold, marry, own, wish,
cost, notice, watch agree with, arrive at / in, shake hands with, succeed in,
suffer from, happen to, take part in, walk into, belong to 等。例如：
This key just fits the lock. 这把钥匙只配这把锁。
15
Your story agrees with what had already been heard. 你说的与我们听说的一致。
3） 系动词无被动语态，如appear, be become, fall, feel, get, grow, keep, look,
remain, seem, smell, sound, stay, taste, turn 等。例如：It sounds good. 听
上去不错。
4） 带同源宾语的及物动词如die/death, dream/dream， live/life 等，以及反身代词，
相互代词，不能用于被动语态。例如：
She dreamed a bad dream last night. 她昨晚做了个恶梦。
5） 当宾语是不定式时，很少用于被动语态。例如：
（对） She likes to swim.
（错） To swim is liked by her.
5. 主动形式表示被动意义
1）wash, clean, cook, iron, look, cut, sell, read, wear, feel, draw, write, sell
等。例如：
The book sells well. 这本书销路好。
This knife cuts easily. 这刀子很好用。
2）blame, let（出租）, remain, keep, rent, build 等。例如：
I was to blame for the accident. 事故发生了，我该受指责。
Much work remains. 还有许多活要干。
3） 在need, require, want, worth （形容词）, deserve 后的动名词必须用主动形式。
例如：
The door needs repairing.= The door needs to be repaired. 门该修了。
This book is worth reading. 这本书值得一读。
4）特殊结构：make sb. heard / understood （使别人能听见/理解自己）等。例如：
Explain it clearly and make yourself understood. 解释清楚些，让别人理解你的
话。
6. 被动形式表示主动意义，如 be determined, be pleased, be graduated （from）, be
prepared （for）, be occupied （in）, get married 等。例如：
He is graduated from a famous university. 他毕业于一所有名的大学。
注意：表示同某人结婚，用marry sb. 或get married to sb.均可。例如：
He married a rich girl. 他与一个富妞结婚了。
He got married to a rich girl.
7.need/want/require/worth
当 need, want, require, be worth 后面接doing 时，表示的是被动意义。例如：
Your hair wants cutting. 你的头发该理了。
The floor requires washing. 地板需要冲洗。
三.巩固练习
1. I___________ (teach) here for ten years since I finished school.
2. Would you mind me __________ (use) your bike?
3. The students of Class Two___________ (sweep) their classroom now.
4. The Whites____________ (not listen) to the radio at that time.
5. It's better to give than__________ (receive).
6. How long ______you_______ (live) in this town?
16
7. You _______ (come) here last year, ______ you?
8. ----When ______ you______ (see) him?
----I______ (see) him last Sunday.
9. She said that the car___________ (use) the next week.
10. I didn't know what __________ (happen) to China in a century.
11. When I got to the station, the train ____ already ______ (leave).
12. The stone bridge______________ (build) in our hometown for ten years.
13. The desk must ______ (clean) once a day.
14. The dog _________ (lie) on the floor when I came in..
15. It _________(rain) heavily when I got home.
16. Her mother____________ (cook) at this time yesterday.
17. The students _____________ (do) their homework. __________ (not make) any
noise!
18. ----______ you ever_______ (be) to Beijing? ----Yes. I________ (go) there last
week.
19. He'll telephone us as soon as he _________ (arrive) there.
20. Jiefang trucks____________ (make) in Changchun.
21. A pen is used for__________ (write).
22. All that must ________ (do).
23 .My friend can't decide which pair of trousers____________ (choose). So she asked
me to go shopping with her.
24. They find it useful__________ (learn) English.
25. The old man often_________ (tell) the children a story in the evening. This
evening he ________ (tell) two stories.
26. The radio__________ (use) once in a week in our class. It____________ (not
use) yesterday because there was something wrong with it.
27. Would please tell us how___________ (make) the watch ________ (work)?
28. She doesn't know what_________ (do) and where__________ (go).
四.答案
17
1. have
taught
2. using
3. are
sweeping
4. weren ’ t
listening
5. to
receive
6. have
…
lived
7. came
…
didn’t
8. did
…
see, saw
9. would be
used
10. would
happen
11. had
…
left
12. have been
built
13. be
cleaned
14. was lying
15. was
raining
16. was
cooking
17. are doing,
Don ’ t
make
18. have
…
beeen,
went
19. arrives
20. are made
21. writing
22. be done
23. to choose
24. to learn
25. tells,
will tell
18
第四章 动词的语气
一.概念
语气有三种:陈述语气,祈使语气和虚拟语气.语气表示说话人对劝词所示示的动作或所处的状态持有的态度或看
法.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.辨别if 引导真实条件句和if 引导的虚拟条件句的区别
If he has time, he will go with us.= Probably he has time and will go with us.
If he had time, he would go with us.=But in fact he has no time.
2.虚拟条件句中主句和从句的谓与动词构成形式如下表
if 条件句中的谓与动词
主句的谓与动词
与现在的事实相反
1. 行为动词用did 形式
2. be 动词用were
should
would
could + 动词原形
might
与过去的事实相反
had + done
should
would
could + have + done
might
与将来的事实相反
1. 行为动词用did
2. should + 动词原形
3. were to + 动词原形
should
would
could + 动词原形
might
3.混合时间的虚拟语气
如果条件句中的动作和主句的动作不是同时发生，主句和从句的谓语动词的形式应分别根据各自所表示的时间加
以调整。
1)0If I had received the passport yesterday, I would start today.
2)If he had telephoned me last night, I would see him now.
3)If he had followed the doctor’s advice, he would be all right now.
4)If China had not been liberated, the working people would still be leading a miserable life.
4.should/ could / might/ ought to + have done 表示“过去本应该/可以做而实际上却没做”
needn’t have done 表示“过去没必要作而实际上做了”
5.虚拟语气中的倒装句
如果虚拟语气的条件从句谓语动词中含有were, had, could, should，有时可将if 省去，而将条件从句的主语置
于were, had, should, could 之后。
Had you invited us, we would have come to your party.
Were I you, I would do more practice after class.
Could she lend us a helping hand, she would do so.
6.wish 后面的宾语从句的谓语动词应使用虚拟语气， 表示“可惜…；….就好了； 悔不该…； 但愿…。”
主句谓语
从句谓语
wish
时态
谓语动词的形式
现在时
表示与wish 同时发生
动词用过去时
be 动词用were
过去时
表示在wish 之前发生的动作
动词用had done
be 用had been
19
将来时
表示在wish 之后发生的动作
动词用would do; should do
be 用 would be ; should be
1)I wish I knew the key to the answer.
2)I wish I were ten years younger.
3)I wish that I had gone to the football match last week.
4)I wish that you had been here yesterday.
5)He wishes that we would visit the old school.
7.表示命令或建议动词suggest, insist, propose, desire, demand, request, order, command 后的宾语从句中应
使用虚拟 should +动词原形； should 不可用would 来替代; 主句所使用的动词时态不限。
8.suggest 为“建议去做…; 命令…”从句用should + do
为“ 说明； 暗示”, 从句用过去时或过去完成时。
1) The doctor suggested that I should take the medicine three times a day.
2) The doctor suggested that my grandmother had caught a bad cold.
9.insist “坚持要去做…，坚持应该去做”，从句用should + do 为“坚持表明，坚持说/解释”， 从句用过去时或过
去完成时。
10.虚拟语气也用于表语从句和主语从句中，表示间接的命令、要求、请求、建议、决定等，主句的主语通常是suggestion,
proposal, request, order, idea 等。表语从句中的谓语动词是should +动词原型，should 可以省略。
11.在主语从句中，当从句用来表示惊奇、不相信、惋惜等，从句的谓语动词用需拟语气形式。其谓语动词时should +
动词原型， 或should 省略。
三.巩固练习
1. If there were no subjunctive mood, English _________ much easier.
A. will be
B. would have been
C. could have been
D. would be
2. If I _____ you, I’d join the army.
A. am
B. was
C. were
D. would be
3. If he _______ tomorrow, he would find Mr Wang in the office.
A. comes
B. will come
C. should come
D. come
4. If it _______ next week , the crops would be saved.
A. rains
B. will rains
C. would rain
D. should rain
5. If I _______ it, I would do it in a different way.
A. were to do
B. do
C. had done
D. was to do
6. Supposing the weather ________ bad, where would you go ?
A. is
B. will be
C. were
D. be
7. If he had worked harder, he _________.
A. would succeed
B. had succeeded
C. should succeed
D. would have succeeded
8. If he ________, he _________ that food.
A. was warned; would not take
B. had been warned; would not have taken
C. would be warned; had not taken
D. would have been warned; had not taken
9. If my lawyer _________ here last Saturday, he _______ me from going.
A. had been; would have prevented
B. had been; would prevent
C. were; would prevent
D. were; would have prevented
20
10. If he ______ it, he _______ it.
A. had seen; could have believed
B. saw; couldn’t believe
C. saw; couldn’t have believed
D. has seen; had believed
11. —Do you think the thief entered through the window?
—No, if he had, I don’t believe, _______ broken the living-room’s window.
A. he would have
B. he must have
C. he had
D. should he have
12. —Did you go swimming last Sunday?
—No. We would have gone ______ nicer.
A. if the weather was
B. would the weather have been
C. had the weather been
D. should the weather be
13. ______ it ______ for your help, I couldn’t have made any progress.
A. Had; not been
B. Should; not been
C. Did; not been
D. Not; been
14. _______ today, he would get there by Friday.
A. Would have left
B. Was he leaving
C. Were he to leave
D. If he leaves
15. It is ordered that a new bridge ______ over the wide river.
A. should be built
B. would built
C. will be built
D. built
四.答案
1.D 2.C 3.C 4.D 5.A 6.C 7.D 8.B 9.A 10.A 11.D 12.C 13.A 14.C 15.A
第5 章 助动词
一.概念:
助动词是帮助主要动词构成各种时态,语态,语气以及否定或疑问结构的动词.助动词分为时态助动词和结构助动词
两种.
二.相关知识点精讲:
1. 助动词be 的用法
1） be +现在分词，构成进行时态。例如：
They are having a meeting. 他们正在开会。
English is becoming more and more important. 英语现在越来越重要。
2） be + 过去分词，构成被动语态。例如：
The window was broken by Tom.. 窗户是汤姆打碎的。
English is taught throughout the world. 世界各地都教英语。
3） be + 动词不定式，可表示下列内容：
a. 表示最近、未来的计划或安排。例如：
He is to go to New York next week.. 他下周要去纽约。
We are to teach the freshmen. 我们要教新生。
说明： 这种用法也可以说成是一种将来时态表达法。
b. 表示命令。例如：
You are to explain this. 对此你要做出解释。
He is to come to the office this afternoon. 要他今天下午来办公室。
21
c. 征求意见。例：
How am I to answer him? 我该怎样答复他？
Who is to go there? 谁该去那儿呢？
d. 表示相约、商定。例如：
We are to meet at the school gate at seven tomorrow morning. 我们明天早晨7 点在校门口集合。
2. 助动词have 的用法
1）have +过去分词，构成完成时态。例如：
He has left for London. 他已去了伦敦。
By the end of last month, they had finished half of their work. 上月未为止，他们已经完成工作的
一半。
2）have + been +现在分词，构成完成进行时。例如：
I have been studying English for ten years. 我一直在学英语，已达十年之久。
3）have +been +过去分词，构成完成式被动语态。例如：
English has been taught in China for many years. 中国教英语已经多年。
3.助动词do 的用法
1）构成一般疑问句。例如：
Do you want to pass the CET? 你想通过大学英语测试吗？
Did you study German? 你们学过德语吗？
2）do + not 构成否定句。例如：
I do not want to be criticized. 我不想挨批评。
He doesn't like to study. 他不想学习。
In the past, many students did not know the importance of English.
过去，好多学生不知道英语的重要性。
3） 构成否定祈使句。例如：
Don't go there. 不要去那里。
Don't be so absent-minded. 不要这么心不在焉。
说明： 构成否定祈使句只用do，不用did 和does。
4）放在动词原形前，加强该动词的语气。例如：
Do come to my birthday party. 一定来参加我的生日宴会。
I did go there. 我确实去那儿了。
I do miss you. 我确实想你。
5）用于倒装句。例如：
Never did I hear of such a thing. 我从未听说过这样的事情。
Only when we begin our college life do we realize the importance of English. 进了大学以后，我们才
认识到英语的重要性。
说明： 引导此类倒装句的副词有never, seldom, rarely, little, only, so, well 等。
6）用作代动词。例如：
---- Do you like Beijing? --你喜欢北京吗？
---- Yes, I do. --是的，喜欢。（do 用作代动词，代替like Beijing.）
He knows how to drive a car, doesn't he? 他知道如何开车，对吧？
4. 助动词shall 和will 的用法
shall 和will 作为助动词可以与动词原形一起构成一般将来时。例如：
I shall study harder at English. 我将更加努力地学习英语。
He will go to Shanghai. 他要去上海。
说明：在过去的语法中，语法学家说shall 用于第一人称，will 只用于第二、第三人称。现在，尤其是在口语中，will
常用于第一人称，但shall 只用于第一人称，如用于第二、第三人称，就失去助动词意义，已变为情态动词，试比较:
22
He shall come. 他必须来。（shall 有命令意味。）
He will come. 他要来。（will 只与动词原形构成一般将来时。）
5.助动词should, would 的用法
1）should 无词义，只是shall 的过去形式，与动词原形构成过去将来时，只用于第一人称。例：
I telephoned him yesterday to ask what I should do next week. 我昨天给他打电话，问他我下周干什么。
比较："What shall I do next week?" I asked. "我下周干什么？"我问道。
可以说，shall 变成间接引语时，变成了should。
2） would 也无词义，是will 的过去形式，与动词原形构成过去将来时，用于第二、第三人称。例如：
He said he would come. 他说他要来。
比较："I will go," he said. 他说："我要去那儿。"变成间接引语，就成了He said he would come。原来的will
变成would，go 变成了come.。
6. 短语动词
动词加小品构成的起动词作用的短语叫短语动词。例如：
Turn off the radio. 把收音机关上。（turn off 是短语动词）
短语动词的构成基本有下列几种：
1）动词+副词，如：black out；
2）动词+介词，如：look into；
3）动词+副词+介词，如：look forward to。构成短语动词的副词和介词都统称为小品词
三.巩固练习
1.If it is fine tomorrow, we ______ a football match.
a. have b. will have c. has d. shall has
2.When he was at school, he ______ early and take a walk before breakfast.
a. will rise b. shall rise b. should rise would rise
3.In the past 30 years China ______ great advances in the socialist revolution and socialist construction.
a. has made b. have made c. had made d. having made
4.I ______ go to bed until I ______ finished my work.
a. don’t/had b. didn’t/have c. didn’t/had d. don’t/have
5.______ you think he ______ back by dinner time?
a. Do/have come b. Did/will have come c. Does/will come d. Do/will have come
6.He said that he dropped his bag when he ______ for the bus.
a. was runing b. was running c. were running d. is running
7.No sooner ______ he arrived home than he ______ to start on another journey.
a. has/was asked b. have/were asked c. had/is asked d. had/was asked
8.“______ you give me a room for the night?” I asked on arriving at the hotel.
a. Should b. Can c. Might d. May
9.There are nine of them, so ______ get into the car at the same time.
a. they may not at all b. all they may not c. they can’t all d. all they can’t
10.“We didn’t see him at the lecture yesterday.” “He ______ it.”
a. mustn’t attend b. cannot have attended
c. would have not attended d. needn’t have attended
11.“You realize that you were driving at 100 mph, don’t you?”
“No, officer. I ______. This car can’t do more than 80.”
a. didn’t need to be b. may not have been c. couldn’t have been d. needn’t have been
12.he was a good runner so he ______ escape from the police.
a. might b. succeeded to c. would d. was able to
13.If they ______, our plan will fall flat.
23
a. are co-operating b. had not co-operated c. won’t co-operate d. didn’t co-operate
14.I hoped ______ my letter.
a. her to answer b. that she would answer c. that she answers d. her answering
15.He ______ live in the country than in the city.
a. prefers b. likes to c. had better d. would rather
16.______ to see a film with us today?
a. Did you like b. Would you like c. Will you like d. Have you liked
17.I’m sorry, but I had no alternative. I simply ______ what I did.
a. must do b. had to do c. ought to have done d. have to do
18.“Time is running out,______?”
a. hadn’t we better got start b. hadn’t we better get start
c.hadn’t we better get started d. hadn’t we better not started
19.No one ______ that to his face.
a. dares say b. dares saying c. dare say d. dare to say
20.The students in the classroom ______ not to make so much noise.
a. need b. ought c. must d. dare
21.You ______ last week if you were really serious about your work.
a. ought to come b. ought to be coming c. ought have come d. ought to have come
22.The elephants ought ______ hours ago by the keepers.
a. to be fed b. to feed c. to being fed d. to have been fed
23.“I wonder why they’re late.” “They ______ the train.”
a. can have missed b. could miss c. may have missed d. might miss
24.“Tom graduated from college at a very young age.”
“He ______ have been an outstanding student.”
a. must b. could c. should d. might
25.You ______ the examination again since you had already passed it.
a. needn’t have taken b. didn’t need to take c. needn’t take d. mustn’t take
26.He is really incompetent! The letter ______ yesterday.
a. should be finished typing b. must be finished typing
c.must have finished typing c. should have been finished typing
27.The boy told his father that he would rather ______ an astronaut.
a. become b. to become c. becoming d. became
28.When we reached the station, the train had still not arrived; so we ______.
a. needed not to hurry b. needn’t have hurried
c. need not to have hurried d. didn’t need to hurry
29.Since your roommate is visiting her family this weekend,_____ you like to have dinner with us tonight?
a. will b. won’t c. wouldn’t d. do
30.He was afraid what he had done ______ a disastrous effect on his career.
a. might have b. could be c. have been d. shall be
四.答案
1-10 BDACDBDBCB 11-20 CDCBDBBCCB 21-30 DDCABDABCA
24
第六章 情态动词
一.概念:
情态动词是表示能力,义务,必须,猜测等说话人语气或情态动词.
二.相关知识点精讲:
1．can
1)表能力
can 表能力时意味着凭体力或脑力或技术等可以无甚阻力地去做某事。
I can climb this pole. 我能爬这根杆子。
He is only four , but he can read. 他只有4 岁，但已认得字了。
Fire can’t destroy gold. 火烧不毁金子。
因为can 不能和其他助动词连用，所以表示将来式时用will be able to
You will be able to skate after you have practiced it two or three times.
你练习两三次后就会溜冰了。
2)表可能性
多用于否定与疑问结构中，但也可用在肯定句中。
Can the news be true? 这消息可能是真的吗？
It can’t be true. 它不可能是真的。
25
What can he possibly mean? 他可能是什么意思？
can 用在肯定句中表示理论上的可能性（一时的可能）。
A horse in the center of London can cost a lot of money.
Attending the ball can be very exciting.
The road can be blocked. 这条路可能会不通的。
may 在肯定句中表示现实的可能性。
The road may be blocked. 这条路可能不通了。
3)表示允许（和may 意思相近）常见于口语。
Can (May) I come in ? 我能进来吗？
Can I smoke here ? 我可以在这里抽烟吗？
2.could 的用法
1)表过去的可能和许可，（多用于间接引语中）
At that time we thought the story could not be true.
那时我们认为所说的事不可能是真的。
Father said I could swim in the river.
爸爸说我可以在河里游泳。
2)表过去的能力
I could swim when I was only six.
我刚六岁就能游泳。
Could 在肯定句中表示过去的能力时，常表抽象的一般的能力。
He could be very naughty when he was a child.
他小时候会是很顽皮的。
3)表“允许”。可表示委婉客气的提出问题或陈述看法
Could I use your bike?
Yes, you can.
他会记得那时吗?
I’m afraid I couldn’t give you an answer today.
恐怕我今天不能回答你。
The teacher said you could go to the store for sweets.
老师说你可以去商店买糖。
3)Could/can+have done 结构表示对过去发生的事情的“怀疑”或“不肯定”。 could 加完成式还用于肯定句时一般
表过去可能完成而却未完成的动作。
Can they have won the basketball match？
他们赢了那场篮球赛吗？
What you referred to just now can have made her very sad.
你刚刚所谈到的可能令他很伤心。
You could have completed the task a little earlier.
你本来能早点完成任务的。（但事实上并没有提前完成任务）
I could have passed my examination easily but I made too many stupid mistakes.
我本可以轻易通过考试，但我犯了太多不该犯的错误。
如表具体做某一件事的能力时，则须用 be able to .
He was able to translate the article without a dictionary.
他可以不用词典翻译那篇文章。
Can 表示一贯的能力 ，be able to 表示客观能力和通过努力可达到的能力
I can’t swim. But I am sure I will be able to swim through more practicing.
The fire spread through the hotel, but everyone was able to get out
26
When the boat sank he was able to swim to the bank
3.may 的用法
1)表示请求、可以、允许。
You may drive the tractor. 你可以开那台拖拉机。
2)当回答由may 引起的问题时，否定答语要用must not,表示“不许可”、“不应该”、“不行”。
May I come in?
Yes, you may.
No,you can’t
No, you may not .
No ,you mustn’t
No ,you’d better not.
3) may /might 推测性用法 可能
He may be right.
He may not come today (可能不)
He may /might come tomorrow.
, 注意: 1 只用于肯定和否定句中,不用于疑问句中。
2 might 比may 可能性更小
He might get a job.
He may get a job.
3 may no 可能不 can not 不可能
He may not come
He can’t come
3)表建议（可和as well 连用）
You may（might）as well stay where you are.
你还是原地待着好。（may as well 有“还是……的好”的含义）
4)表祝愿
May you be happy!
might
1)表过去的“可能”和“允许”多用于间接引语。
She said that he might take her dictionary.
她说他可以拿她的词典去用。
除在间接引语中外，might 一般不表示过去的“可能”与“许可”。表过去的“可能”可用could，表过去的“许可”
可用were (was) allowed to。
2)表现在的“可能”，其可能性要比may 小。
Electric irons could be dangerous; they might give you a severe shock.
电熨斗会有危险，它可能电着人。
3)may (might) + have +done 表示对过去发生行为的推测，含有“想必”、“也许是”的意思。
It may have been true. 这事也许是真的。
He might not have settled the question. 他可能尚未解决那个问题。
4.must 的主要用法。
1)表示必须、必要
We must do everything step by step .我们须按部就班地做一切事情。
Why must you always bother me? 为什么你偏要打扰我呢。
2)must be + 表语的结构，通常表示猜测，含有“一定”之意。（只用在肯定句中）
He must be an honest boy. 他一定是个诚实的男孩。
This must be your room. 这一定是你的房间。
27
3)must 的否定式有两个：当回答由must 引起的问题时，否定答复要用needn’t 或don’t have to 表示“不必”、“无
须”、“用不着”、“不一定”的意义。当表示“不应该”、“不许可”、“禁止”时，就用must not。
Must I go tomorrow?明天我必须去吗？
Yes, please.是的，请吧！
No , you needn’t. 不，你不必去。
4)must +have +过去分词的结构，常用在肯定句中，表示对过去发生行为的推测，含有“一定”、“准是”的意思。否
定和疑问句用can。
She must have studied English before.她以前一定学过英语。
5.have to 的含义与must 是很接近的,只是have to 比较强调客观需要，must 着重说明主观看法。
I must clean the room.（主观想法）
I have to clean the room.（客观需要）
另外，have to 能用于更多时态：
We had to be there at ten .我们得在十点钟到那里。
We will have to reconsider the whole thing.
这一切我们将不得不重新加以考虑。
have to 的否定式：don’t have to do 表示“不必做……”之意。
6.ought to 的用法
Ought to 后接动词原形，表义务，但不及must 那样具有信心，如：
You don’t look well. You ought to go to see the doctor.
你气色不好，应该去看病。
Ought to 用于否定句，其否定形式可缩略为oughtn’t ，如：
You oughtn’t to smoke so much. 你不应该抽这么多烟。
也可以用于疑问句，如：
Ought you to smoke so much?你应该抽这样多烟吗？
Ought to 在间接引语中表过去时形式不变，如：
He said you ought to tell the police.
他说你应该去报告警察。
7.shall 的用法
1)用于第一人称征求对方的意见，如：
What shall I wear on the journey? 我路上穿什么好呢？
Shall we dance? 我们跳舞好吗？
2)shall 用于第二、三人称时表允诺，警告，命令，威胁（现已少见），如：
She shall get her share. 她可以得到她的一份。
You shall have it back tomorrow.你明天可以将它拿回。
情态动词should 一般不应被认为是情态动词shall 的过去式，主要用法有：
1)用于第一人称疑问句中询问对方的意愿，但语气较委婉温和，如：
What should we do now? 我们现在该怎么办？
2)表示应该、必须，常与must 换用。例如：
We should (must) master a foreign language at least.
我们应当至少掌握一门外语。
3)“should+be+表语”的结构，表示推测或惊奇。例如：
They should be back by now. 他们现在应该回来了吧。
I am sorry that she should be so careless. 我感到遗憾她竟会那样粗心。
4)“should+have+过去分词”的结构，表示过去该做而实际上尚未做的动作或行为；其否定则表示发生了不应该发生
的行为。其同义结构“ought to have +过去分词”,表示过去“早应该”、“本当”之意，语气较强。例如：
I should have thought of that. 这一点我是应当想到的。（但没想到）
28
They should not have left so soon.他们不应当走得这么早。（但已走了）
5) 在“It is natural (strange, natural, necessary, surprised, impossible, important ) that……”句型中，
主语从句中的谓语动词要用should +动词原形”表示“理所当然”、“奇怪”、“必要”、“惊异”等的意思。在lest（以
免）、for fear (that) (以防)、in case（以备万一）等之后也要用should+动词原形;在advise, sugest, order, demand,
request 等的从句中should+do”例如：
It is necessary that he(should) be sent there at once.
有必要马上派他到那里去。
It is strange that he should say so. 他会说这样的话真是奇怪。
Let us go at once lest we should be late for the train.
我们马上走吧，以免赶不上火车。
8..will 和would 的用法
1）表示意志，决心或愿望。例如：
Surely we will support all the people in the world in their struggle for peace.
我们一定要支持全世界人民争取和平的斗争。
He would not let me try it . 他不肯让我去试。
2）will 表示经常性、习惯性、倾向性，would 表示过去的习惯行为。
He will sit there hour after hour looking at the traffic go by.
他会经常一连几个小时坐在那儿观看来往的车辆。
He would come to see me when he was in Beijing.
他在北京时，常来看望我。
3）用于第二人称作主语的疑问句中，表示对对方的请求，would 的语气比will 委碗
Would/will you kindly tell me the way to the station? 请问到火车站怎么走？
4）表可能性
This will be the book you are looking for.
这可能就是你要找的书。
She eould be about 60 when she died.
他死时大概60 岁。
9. need 和dare 的用法
情态动词need 实义动词 need
现 You need (not) do You (don’t) need to do
在
时 He need (not) do He needs (doesn’t need) to do
过 You needed (didn’t need) to do
去
时 He needed (didn’t need) to do
将 You need (not) do You will (not) need to do
来
时 He need (not) do He will (not) need to do
句型 时态 动词
情态动词dare 实义动词 dare
肯定句 现在时 dare to 少用 dare/dares to do
过去时 dare to 少用 dared to do
否定句 现在时 daren’t/dare not do do/does not dare (to) do
过去时 dared not do did not dare (to) do
29
疑问句 现在时 Dare he do? Do you/Does he dear (to) do?
过去时 Dared he do? Did he dare (to) do
needn’t have v-ed 表示过去做了某事，但没有做的必要， 意为“本没必要…”。例如：
You needn’t have waken me up; I don’t have to go to work today
10.表推测的情态动词句子的反意疑问句
He must/may be in the room, isn’t he?
He can’t be in the room, is he？
He must have finished the work, hasn’t he?
He may have done the work last night, didn’t he?
：情态动词+行为动词进行式
情态动词+行为动词进行式（即情态动词+ be + v-ing 形式），表示推测或评论某动作现在是否正在进行。例如：
1）He must be playing basketball in the room.
2）She may be staying at home.
11.情态动词+行为动词完成进行式
情态动词+行为动词完成进行式（即情态动词+ have been + v-ing 形式），表示推测或评论过去某动作是否正在
进行或一直在进行。例如：
1）They should have been meeting to discuss the problem.
2）He may / might have been buying stamps in the post office when you saw him.
12.used to +v, be used to +v-ing 和be used to +v
（1）used to +v 意为“过去常常”，“过去一直”；be used to +v-ing / n（名词）意为“习惯于”；be used to +v
意为“被用来（做某事）”。
（2）used to 只表示过去，而be used to +v-ing / n 可表示现在、过去或将来。例如：
1）He used to smoke. Now he doesn’t.
2）He’s quite used to hard work / working hard.
3）The knife is used to cut bread.
13．用作情态动词的其他短语
would rather, would sooner, would (just) as soon, had rather, had better, had sooner, can not but, may
(just) as well 等可用作情态动词。例如：
1）The soldier would sooner die than surrender.
2）The brave soldier would as soon die as yield to such an enemy.
3）I’d rather walk than take a bus.
4）If you don’t like to swim, you may just as well stay at home.
注：这些短语后一般直接跟动词原形.would (had) rather, would (had) sooner, would (just) as soon 后可跟
that 引导的从句，that 常省去，从句要用虚拟语气。对现在和将来的假设用过去时，对过去的假设用过去完成时。
例如：
1）I would rather you came on Sunday.
2）I would sooner you hadn’t asked me to speak yesterday.
三. 巩固练习:
1. _____ you ready?
(A)
Are (B) Have
(C) Will (D) Can
2. ____ here early?
(A)
Will he (B) Was he (C) Did he be (D) Were he
3.
I ___ happy about the price of eggs.
(A) am't (B) am not (C) do not (D) won’t
4.
Since last year I____ him only once.
30
(A)
have seen (B) have been seeing (C)
see (D) was seeing
5.
Donald ___ sixteen tomorrow.
(A)
is being (B) going to be
(C)
shall be (D) will be
6.
I ___ the story at all.
(A) don't like
(B) like (C)
am fond of
(D) would like
7.
I would rather ___ than play now.
(A) to study
(B)am studying
(C)
study
(D) studied
8. I'd rather you ___ anything about it for the time being.
(A) do (B) didn't do (C)
don't
(D) didn't
9. The car___much money.
(A)
not cost (B) not have cost (C)
isn't cost
(D) didn't cost
10. I ___ like to eat fish.
(A) am (B) have (C) do (D) be
11. ___ repeat the question?
(A)
Shall I (B) Will I (C)Would you like that I (D) Do you want that I
12.
My teacher knows more than ___.
(A)
my uncle knows
(B) my uncle does
(C)
they know
(D)they don't know
13.
He___to meet us at the station, but didn't see us.
(A)
did go (B) did went (C) goes (D) had
14.
Not only ____us light.
(A)
does the sun give (B) the sun gives
(C) gives the sun (D) the sun does give
15.
____ you tell me what has happened?
(A) May (B) Must (C) Can (D) Could
16.
Anne___tomorrow.
(A) can sing (B) can to sing (C) is going sing (D) going to sing
17.
You___hand it in at once, you may hand it in tomorrow.
(A)
needn't (B) may not (C) can't (D) must not
18.
Tell the boy that he ___ in the river.
(A) swims (B) swim (C) swimming (D) to swim
19.
Joan___play on Saturday.
(A) going to (B) can (C) is going (D) can to
20.
Susan and I can go to the lecture ___.
(A) but neither can Charles (B) and so Charies can
(C)
but Charles can't (D) and Charles also can
四.答案
1.
(A)
2,
(B)
3.
(B)
4.
(A)
5,
(D)
6,
(A)
7.
11.
(A)
12.
(B)
13.
(A)
14.
(A)
15.
(D)
16.
(A)
17.
第七章 动词不定式
一.相关知识点精讲:
1. 不定式作补语
1） 有些有动词+宾语+不定式的结构。例如：
advise
allow
cause
challenge
command
compel
31
drive 驱使
enable
encourage
forbid
force
impel
induce
instruct
invite
like/love
order
permit
make
let
have
want
get
warn
persuade
request
send
tell
train
urge
例如；
Father will not allow us to play on the street. 父亲不让我们在街上玩耍。
The officer ordered his men to fire. 长官命令士兵开火。
注意：有些动词如make，have，get，want 等可用不定式作做宾补，也可用分词作宾补。现在分词表达主动，也表达
正在进行，过去分词表达被动。
2) 有些有动词+宾语+不定式的结构，不定式的动词往往是be，不定式一般可以省去。例如：
consider
find
believe
think
declare （声
称）
appoint
guess
fancy（设想） guess
judge
imagine
know
例如：
We believe him to be guilty. 我们相信他是有罪的。
We know him to be a fool. 我们知道他是个笨蛋。（to be 不能省去）
典型例题
Charles Babbage is generally considered ___ the first computer.
A. to invent B. inventing C. to have invented D. having invented
答案：C. 一般没有consider+宾语+be 以外不定式的结构，也没有consider+宾语+doing 的结构，排除A、B、D。consider
用动词be 以外的不定式作宾补时，一般要求用不定式的完成式，故选C。
3) 有些动词可以跟there +to be 的结构。例如：
believe
expect
intend
like
love
mean
prefer
want
wish
understand
例如：
We didn't expect there to be so many people there. 我们没料到会有那么多人在那里。
You wouldn’t want there to be another war. 你不至于想让另外一场战争发生吧。
2. 不定式作主语
不定式作主语，往往用it 作形式主语，真正的主语不定式放至句子的后面。
例如：It's so nice to hear your voice. 听到你的声音真高兴。
It's necessary for you to lock the car when you do not use it. 不用车的时候，锁车是有必要的。
It's very kind of you to help us. 他帮助我们，他真好。
It seemed selfish of him not to give them anything. 他不给他们任何东西，这显得太自私了。
但是，用不定式作主语的句子中还有一个不定式作表语时，不能用It is… to…的句型。另外，这样的句子，不能用
动名词作表语。
3. It's for sb.和 It's of sb.
这样的句子中，由于表语形容词性质的不同，导致了不定式逻辑主语标志用for 或of 的区别。
1）for sb. 句型中的形容词一般为表示事物的特征特点，表示客观形式的形容词，如easy, hard, difficult,
interesting, impossible 等：例如：
It's very hard for him to study two languages. 对他来说学两门外语是很难的。
2）of sb句型中的形容词一般为表示性格，品德，心智能力，表示主观感情或态度的形容词，如good, kind, nice, clever,
foolish, right。例如：
It's very nice of you to help me. 你来帮助我，你真是太好了。
用for 还是用of 的另一种辨别方法：
用介词for 或of 后面的逻辑主语作句子的主语，用介词前边的形容词作表语，造个句子。如果通顺用of，不通则
用for。例如：
32
You are nice. （通顺，所以应用of）。
He is hard. （非所表达的意思，不通，因此用for。）
4. 不定式作表语
不定式可放在be 动词后面，形成表语。例如：
My work is to clean the room every day. 我的工作是每天清扫房间。
His dream is to be a doctor. 他的梦想是成为一名医生。
5. 不定式作定语
不定式做定语通常要放在被修饰的词后，往往表示未发生的动作。例如：
I have a lot of work to do. 我有许多事要做。
There was nothing to bring home that morning. 那天早上（他回家时）两手空空。
6. 不定式作状语
1）目的状语
常用结构为to do , only to do（仅仅为了）, in order to do, so as to do, so（such）… as to…（如
此…以便…）。例如：
He ran so fast as to catch the first bus. 他飞快地跑以便赶上第一班车。
I come here only to say good-bye to you. 我来仅仅是向你告别。
2）作结果状语，可以表示没有预料到的或事与愿违的结果，不定式要放在句子后面。
I awoke to find my truck gone. 我醒来发现箱子不见了。
He searched the room only to find nothing. 他搜索了房间，没发现什么。
3） 表原因
I'm glad to see you. 见到你很高兴。
She wept to see the sight. 她一看到这情形就哭了。
4）表示理由和条件
He must be a fool to say so.
You will do well to speak more carefully.
7.用作介词的to
to 可以用作介词，也可用作不定式的标示。下面的to 都用作介词：
admit to
object to
be accustomed to be used to
stick to
turn to 开始
look forward
to
be
devoted
to
pay attention to contribute
to
apologize
to
devote oneself
to
8. 省去to 的动词不定式
1） 情态动词 （ 除ought 外） 后。
2） 使役动词 let, have, make 后，感官动词 see, watch, look at, notice , observe, hear, listen to, smell,
feel, find 等后。
注意：被动语态中不能省去to。例如：
I saw him dance. 我看见他跳舞。
=He was seen to dance.
The boss made them work the whole night. 老板让他们整夜干活。
=They were made to work the whole night.
3） would rather，had better 句型后
4） Why… / why no…句型后
5） help 后可带to，也可不带to, help sb （to） do sth：
6） but 和except 后。but 前是实义动词do 时，后面出现的不定式不带to。
比较：He wants to do nothing but go out. 他只想出去玩。
He wants to believe anything but to take the medicine. 除了吃这药，他什么都信。
7） 由and, or 和than 连接的两个不定式，第二个to 可以省去：
33
8） 通常在discover, imagine, suppose, think 等词后作宾补时，可以省去to be。例如：
He is supposed （to be） nice. 他应该是个好人。
9.动词不定式的否定式
在不定式标志to 前加上not。例如：
Tell him not to shut the window。让他别关窗。
She pretended not to see me when I passed by. 我走过的时候，她假装没看见。
10.不定式的特殊句型too…to…
1）too…to 太…以至于…。例如：
He is too excited to speak. 他太激动了，说不出话来。
---- Can I help you ? 需要我帮忙吗?
---- Well, I'm afraid the box is too heavy for you to carry it, but thank you all the same.
不用了。这箱子太重，恐怕你搬不动。谢谢。
2） 如在too 前有否定词，则整个句子用否定词表达肯定，too 后那个词表达一种委婉含义，意 为"不太"。例如：
It's never too late to mend. 改过不嫌晚。（谚语）
3） 当too 前面有only, all, but 时，意思是：非常… 等于very。例如：
I'm only too pleased to be able to help you. 能帮助你我非常高兴。
He was but too eager to get home. 他非常想回家。
11. 不定式的特殊句型so as to
1） 表示目的；它的否定式是so as not to do。例如：
Tom kept quiet about the accident so as not to lose his job.汤姆对事故保持沉默是为了不丢掉他的工
作。
Go in quietly so as not to wake the baby.轻点进去，别惊醒了婴儿。
2） 表示结果。例如：
Would you be so kind as to tell me the time? 劳驾，现在几点了。
12. 不定式的特殊句型Why not
"Why not +动词原形"表达向某人提出建议，翻译为："为什么不……?" "干吗不……?"。例如：
Why not take a holiday? 干吗不去度假?
13.不定式的时态和语态
1） 一般式表示的动词，有时与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生，有时发生在谓语动词的动作之后，例如
He seems to know this. 他似乎知道这事。
I hope to see you again. = I hope that I'll see you again. 我希望再见到你。
2） 完成式表示的动作发生在谓语动词表示的动作之前。例如：
I'm sorry to have given you so much trouble. 很抱歉，给你添了那么多的麻烦。
He seems to have caught a cold. 他好像已经得了感冒。
3） 进行式表示动作正在进行，与谓语动词表示的动作同时发生。例如：
He seems to be eating something. 他好像正在吃什么东西。
4） 完成进行式表示动作从过去开始并延续至说话的时候。例如：
She is known to have been working on the problem for many years. 我们知道她研究这问题有好几年了。
14. 动名词与不定式
1）动名词与不定式的区别：
动名词表达的是： 状态，性质，心境，抽象，经常性，已发生的
不定式表达的是： 目的，结果，原因，具体，一次性，将发生的
2）有些动词如continue 接不定式或动名词作宾语，意义基本相同。
3）有些动词如continue 接不定式或动名词作宾语，意义大相径庭。常见的，下一节有专门讨论
34
第八章 分词
一.概念:
分词分为现在分词和过去分词两种,是一种非谓语动词形式
二.相关知识点精讲:
1.现在分词的用法：
1) 做表语：
He was very amusing.
That book was rather boring.
很多动词的现在分词都可以作表语：
exciting, interesting, encouraging, disappointing, confusing, touching, puzzling.
2) 作定语：
上面所出现的现在分词都可以用作定语, 修饰一个名词：
That must have been a terrifying experience.
I found him a charming person.
现在分词短语还可以放在名词的后面修饰名词, 相当于一个定语从句：
There are a few boys swimming in the river.
There is a car waiting outside.
3) 作状语：
现在分词短语可以表示一个同时发生的次要的或伴随的动作：
Following Tom, we started to climb the mountain.
Opening the drawer, he took out a box.
Taking a key out of his pocket, he opened the door.
现在分词短语还可以表示原因, 相当于一个原因状语从句：
Not knowing her address, we couldn’t get in touch with her.
Being unemployed, he hasn’t got much money.
现在分词短语还可以表示时间, 相当于一个时间状语从句：
Hearing the news, they all jumped with joy.
Returning home, he began to do his homework.
Jim hurt his arm while playing tennis.
Be careful when crossing the road.
Having found a hotel, we looked for somewhere to have dinner.
Having finished her work, she went home.
4)作宾补：
现在分词在一些动词之后可以做宾语的补语：
例如, see, hear, catch, find, keep , have 等.
I see him passing my house every day.
I caught him stealing things in that shop.
I smelt something burning.
She kept him working all day.
2.过去分词的用法：
1) 作表语：
We were so bored that we couldn’t help yawning.
She felt confused, and even frightened.
They were very pleased with the girl.
I’m satisfied with your answer.
35
He is not interested in research.
2) 作定语：
She has a pleased look on her face.
The teacher gave us a satisfied smile.
cooked food a written report
fried eggs boiled water
frozen food armed forces
required courses fallen leaves
finished products a forced smile
the risen sun new arrived visitors
What’s the language spoken in that country?
They’re problem left over by history.
The play put on by the teachers was a big success.
Is there anybody injured?
Do you know the number of books ordered?
3)作状语：
Seen from the hill, the city looks magnificent.
Given good health, I hope to finish the work this year.
They came in, followed by some children.
Depressed, he went to see his elder sister.
When treated with kindness, he was very amiable.
4)作宾补：
过去分词也同样可以作宾语的补语， 接在某些动词后面
I will have the clothes washed tomorrow.
When they get back home, they found the room robbed.
三.巩固练习
1. __________ with the best students, I still have a long way to go.
A. Having compared B. To compare
C. Compared D. Compare
（ ） 2. The music of the film _________ by him sounds so ___________ .
A. playing, exciting B. played, excited
C. playing, excited D. played, exciting
（ ） 3. __________ against the coming hurricane, they dared not leave home.
A. Warned B. Having warned
C. To warn D. Warn
（ ） 4. In __________ countries, you can’t always make yourself _______ by speaking English.
A. English-speaking, understand B. English-spoken, understand
C. English-speaking, understood D. English-speaking, understood
（ ）5. After _____________ the old man, the doctor suggested that he ___________ a bad cold.
A. examining, should catch B. examined, had caught
C. examining, had caught D. examined, catch
（ ） 6. _____________ , Tom jumped into the river and had a good time in it.
A. Be a good swimmer B. Being a good swimmer
C. Having been good swimmer D. To be a good swimmer
（ ） 7. ________ how to read the new words, I often look them up in the dictionary.
A. Having not known B. Not to know
36
C. Don’t know D. Not knowing
（ ） 8. As his parent, you shouldn’t have your child ___________ such a book.
A. read B. to read
C. reading D. be reading
（ ） 9. He returned from abroad ______________ that his mother had been badly ill.
A. heard B. having been heard
C. having phoned D. having been phoned
四.答案:
1. C 2. D 3. A 4. C 5. C 6. B 7. D 8. C 9. D
37
第九章 动名词
一. 概念
动名词由动词原形+ING 构成,是一种非谓语动词形式
二. 相关知识点精讲:
1.作主语。例如：
Fighting broke out between the South and the North. 南方与北方开战了。
2.作宾语
a. 有些动词可以用动名词作宾语。例如：
admit 承认
appreciate 感
激
avoid 避免
complete 完成
consider
认
为
delay 耽误
deny 否认
detest 讨厌
endure 忍受
enjoy 喜欢
escape 逃脱
fancy 想象
finish 完成 imagine 想象
mind 介意
miss 想念
postpone
推
迟
practice 训
练
recall 回忆 resent 讨厌
resume 继续
resist 抵抗
risk 冒险
suggest
建
议
face 面对
include 包括
stand 忍受
understand 理解 forgive
宽
恕
keep 继续
例如：Would you mind turning down your radio a little, please? 你把收音机音量调小一点，好吗
The squirrel was lucky that it just missed being caught. 这松鼠幸运得很，刚逃避了被逮住的厄运。
b. 有些结构后面可以用动名词作宾语或其他成分。例如：
admit to
prefer…to
be used to
lead to
devote
oneself to
object to
stick to
no good
no use
be fond of
look forward
to
be proud of
be busy
can't help
be tired of
be
capable
of
be afraid of
think of
burst out
keep on
insist on
count on
set about
put off
be good at
take up
give up
be successful
in
3.作表语，对主语说明、解释。例如：
Her job is washing, cleaning and taking care of the children. 她的工作是洗刷、清扫和照顾孩子。
38
比较：She is washing, cleaning and taking care of the children.
4.作定语，一般表示所修饰名词事物的用途。例如：
a writing desk=a desk for writing 写字台
a swimming pool=a pool swimming 游泳池
有些动名词作定语，与所修饰的名词关系比较复杂。例如：
boiling point=a temperature point at which something begins to boil 沸点
a walking tractor=a tractor which a driver can operate while he or she is walking behind it 手扶拖
拉机
三.巩固练习
1. I was ______ work last week, but I changed my mind.
a. to start b. to have started c. to be starting d. to have been starting
2. I intended ______ the matter with you, but I had some guests hen.
a. discuss b. discussing c. having discussed d. to have discussed
3. Don’t let me catch you ______.
a. do that again b. to do that again c. doing that again d. done that again
4. There are many kinds of metals ______.
a. each has its special properties b. one has its special properties
c.each having its special properties d. having its special properties
5. It’s pay-day, and they’re waiting ______.
a. for paying b. to be paid c. to be paying d. to have paid
6. _______ trouble, I’m going to forget the whole affair.
a. Then rather cause b. Rather causing
c. Rather than cause d. Rather than caused
7. The brilliance of his satires was ______ make even his victims laugh.
a. so as to b. such as to c. so that d. such that
8. Children with parents whose guidance is firm, consistent, and rational are inclined ______ high levels
of self-confidence.
a. possess b. have possessed c. to possess d. possessing
9. The worker is ______ in repairing the machine to notice my coming.
a. too busy b. enough busy c. busy too d. busy enough
10. “What did you do in the garden?”
“I watched my father ______ his motorbike.”
a. to repair b. repaired c. repairing d. repairs
四.答案
BDCCBCBCAC
第10 章 形容词和副词
一. 概念
形容词是用来修饰,描述名词或代词的词,主要用作定语,表语和补足语等.
副词是用来修饰动词,形容词,其化副词,介词短语或全句的词.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.形容词及其用法
1）直接说明事物的性质或特征的形容词是性质形容词，它有级的变化，可以用程度副词修饰，在句中可作定语、表语
和补语。例如：hot。
2）叙述形容词只能作表语，所以又称为表语形容词。这类形容词没有级的变化，也不可用程度副词修饰。大多数以a
39
开头的形容词都属于这一类。例如：afraid 害怕的。
这类词还有： well，unwell，ill，faint，afraid，alike，alive，alone，asleep，awake 等。
3）形容词作定语修饰名词时，要放在名词的前边。但是如果形容词修饰以-thing 为字尾的词语时，要放在这些词之后。
例如：something nice.
2.以-ly 结尾的形容词
1） 大部分形容词加-ly 可构成副词。但 friendly，deadly，lovely，lonely，likely，lively，ugly，brotherly，
仍为形容词。
改错： （错） She sang lovely.
（错） He spoke to me very friendly.
（对） Her singing was lovely.
（对） He spoke to me in a very friendly way.
2）有些以-ly 结尾既为形容词，也为副词，如daily，weekly，monthly，yearly，early 等。例如：
The Times is a weekly paper. 《时代周刊》为周刊。
The Times is published weekly. 《时代周刊》每周发行一期。
3.用形容词表示类别和整体
1） 某些形容词加上定冠词可以泛指一类人，与谓语动词的复数连接，如the dead，the living，the rich，the poor，
the blind，the hungry 等。例如：
The poor are losing hope. 穷人行将失去希望。
2） 有关国家和民族的形容词加上定冠词指这个民族的整体，与动词的复数连用，如the British，the English，the
French，the Chinese 等。例如：
The English have wonderful sense of humor. 英国人颇有幽默感。
4. 多个形容词修饰名词的顺序
多个形容词修饰名词时，其顺序为：限定词--数词--描绘词--（大小，长短，形状，新旧，颜色）--出处--材料性
质--类别--名词。例如：
a small round table/ a tall gray building/ a dirty old brown shirt/ a famous German medical school/
an expensive Japanese sports car
2） One day they crossed the ____bridge behind the palace.
A. old Chinese stone B. Chinese old stone C. old stone Chinese D. Chinese stone old
答案A. 几个形容词修饰一个名词，他们的排列顺序是：年龄，形状，大小+颜色+来源+质地+用途+国家+名词。
3） ---- How was your recent visit to Qingdao?
---- It was great. We visited some friends，and spent the ___days at the seaside.
A. few last sunny B. last few sunny C. last sunny few D. few sunny last
5.副词的位置
1） 在动词之前。
2） 在be 动词、助动词之后。
3） 多个助动词时，副词一般放在第一个助动词后。
注意：
a. 大多数方式副词位于句尾，但宾语过长，副词可以提前，以使句子平衡。例如：
We could see very clearly a strange light ahead of us.我们清楚地看到前面有奇怪的光。
b. 方式副词well，badly，hard 等只放在句尾。例如：
He speaks English well. 他英语说得好。
6.副词的排列顺序：
1） 时间，地点副词，小单位的在前，大单位在后。
2） 方式副词，短的在前，长的在后，并用and 或but 等连词连接。例如：
Please write slowly and carefully. 请写得慢一些，仔细一些
3） 多个不同副词排列：程度+地点+方式+时间副词。
40
注意：副词very 可以修饰形容词，但不能修饰动词。
改错：（错） I very like English.
（对） I like English very much.
注意：副词enough 要放在形容词的后面，形容词enough 放在名词前后都可。例如：
I don't know him well enough. 他我不熟悉。
There is enough food for everyone to eat.有足够的食物供每个人吃。
There is food enough for everyone to eat.
7.兼有两种形式的副词
1） close 与closely
close 意思是"近"；closely 意思是"仔细地"。例如：
He is sitting close to me. 他就坐在我边上。
Watch him closely. 盯着他。
2） late 与lately
late 意思是"晚"；lately 意思是"最近"。例如：
You have come too late. 你来得太晚了。
What have you been doing lately? 近来好吗？
3） deep 与deeply
deep 意思是"深"，表示空间深度；deeply 时常表示感情上的深度，"深深地"。例如：
He pushed the stick deep into the mud.他把棍子深深插进泥里。
Even father was deeply moved by the film.老爸也被电影深深打动了。
4） high 与highly
high 表示空间高度；highly 表示程度，相当于much。例如：
The plane was flying high. 这架飞机飞得很高。
I think highly of your opinion. 你的看法很有道理。
5） wide 与widely
wide 表示空间宽度；widely 意思是"广泛地"，"在许多地方"。例如：
He opened the door wide. 他把门开得大大的。
English is widely used in the world.英语在世界范围内广泛使用。
6） free 与freely
free 的意思是"免费"；freely 的意思是"无限制地"。例如：
You can eat free in my restaurant whenever you like.无论什么时候，我这饭铺免费对你开放。
You may speak freely; say what you like.你可以畅所欲言，想说什么就说什么。
8. 形容词与副词的比较级
大多数形容词（性质形容词）和副词有比较级和最高级的变化，即原级、比较级和最高级，用来表示事物的等级
差别。原级即形容词的原形，比较级和最高级有规则变化和不规则变化两种。
1） 规则变化
单音节词和少数双音节词，加词尾-er，-est 来构成比较级和最高级。
构成法
原级
比较级
最高级
一般单音节词未尾加-er,-est
tall
taller
tallest
以不发音的e 结尾的单音词和少数以- le 结
尾的双音节词只加-r,-st
nice
nicer
nicest
以一个辅音字母结尾的闭音节单音节词，双
写结尾的辅音字母，再加-er,-est
big
bigger
biggest
"以辅音字母+y"结尾的双音节词，改y 为i，
再加-er，-est
busy
busier
busiest
少数以-er,-ow 结尾的双音节词未尾加
clever/narrow
cleverer/ narrower
cleverest/ narrowest
41
-er,-est
其他双音节词和多音节词，在前面加more，
most 来构成比较级和最高级
important/
easily
more important/ more
easily
most important/ most
easily
2） 不规则变化
原级
比较级
最高级
good
better
best
well（健康的）
worse
worst
bad
ill（有病的）
old
older/elder
oldest/eldest
much/many
more
most
little
less
least
far
farther/further
farthest/furthest
9.as + 形容词或副词原级 + as
1）在否定句或疑问句中可用so… as。例如：
He cannot run so/as fast as you. 他没你跑得快。
2）当as… as 中间有名词时采用以下格式：as +形容词+ a +单数名词/ as + many/much +名词。例如：
This is as good an example as the other is. 这个例子和另外一个一样好。
I can carry as much paper as you can. 你能搬多少纸，我也能。
3）用表示倍数的词或其他程度副词做修饰语时，放在as 的前面。例如：
This room is twice as big as that one. 这房间的面积是那间的两倍。
Your room is the same size as mine. 你的房间和我的一样大。
4）倍数+ as + adj. + as <=> 倍数+ the … + of。例如：
This bridge is three times as long as that one. 这座桥的长度是那座的三倍。
This bridge is three times the length of that one.
Your room is twice as large as mine. 你的房间是我的两倍大。
Your room is twice the size of mine.
10. 比较级形容词或副词 + than 。例如：
You are taller than I. 你比我高。
They lights in your room are brighter than those in mine.你房间的那些灯比我房间里的亮。
注意：
1）要避免重复使用比较级。
（错） He is more cleverer than his brother.
（对） He is more clever than his brother.
（对） He is clever than his brother.
2）要避免将主语含在比较对象中。
（错） China is larger than any country in Asia.
（对） China is larger than any other countries in Asia.
3）要注意对应句型，遵循前后一致的原则。
The population of Shanghai is larger than that of Beijing.
It is easier to make a plan than to carry it out.
4）要注意定冠词在比较级中的使用。
比较：Which is larger, Canada or Australia?
Which is the larger country, Canada or Australia?
She is taller than her two sisters.
She is the taller of the two sisters.
42
11.可修饰比较级的词
1）a bit, a little, rather, much, far, by far, many, a lot, lots, a great deal, any, still, even 等。
2）还可以用表示倍数的词或度量名词作修饰语。
3）以上词（除by far）外，必须置于比较级形容词或副词的前面。
12. many, old 和 far
1） 如果后接名词时，much more +不可数名词，many more +可数名词复数。
2） old 有两种比较级和最高级形式: older/oldest 和elder/eldest。elder，eldest 只用于兄弟姐妹的长幼关系。
例如：
My elder brother is an engineer. 我哥哥是个工程师。
Mary is the eldest of the three sisters. 玛丽是三姐妹中最大的。
3） far 有两种比较级，farther，further。一般father 表示距离，further 表示进一步。例如：
I have nothing further to say. 我没什么要说了。
13. the + 最高级 + 比较范围
1）形容词最高级前通常必须用定冠词 the，副词最高级前可不用。例如：
The Sahara is the biggest desert in the world. 撒哈拉沙漠是世界上最大的沙漠。
形容词most 前面没有the，不表示最高级的含义，只表示"非常"。例如：
It is a most important problem. =It is a very important problem. 这是个很重要的问题。
注意：使用最高级要注意将主语包括在比较范围内。
（错） Tom is the tallest of his three brothers.
（对） Tom is the tallest of the three brothers.
2） 下列词可修饰最高级，by far, far, much, mostly, almost。例如：
This hat is nearly / almost the biggest. 这帽子差不多是最大的了。
注意：
a. very 可修饰最高级，但位置与much 不同。
This is the very best.
This is much the best.
b. 序数词通常只修饰最高级。例如：
Africa is the second largest continent.非洲是第二大洲。
3） 最高级的意义有时可以用比较级表示出来。例如：
Mike is the most intelligent in his class. 马克是班上最聪明的。
Mike is more intelligent than any other students in his class.
4） "否定词语+比较级"，"否定词语+ so… as"结构也可以表示最高级含义。例如：
Nothing is so easy as this. 没比这更简单的了。
=Nothing is easier than this.
=This is the easiest thing.
14. 和more 有关的词组，
1） the more…the more… 越……就越……。例如：
The harder you work，the greater progress you'll make. 越努力，进步越大。
2） more B than A=less A than B 与其说A 不如说B。例如：
He is more lazy than slow at his work. = He is less slow than lazy at his work. 他工作时，与其说
是反应慢不如说是懒。
3） no more… than… 与……一样……，不比……多。例如：
The officials could see no more than the Emperor. 官员们看到的和皇帝一样多。
no less… than… 与……一样……。例如：
He is no less diligent than you. 他和你一样勤勉。
4） more than 不只是，非常。例如：
43
She is more than kind to us all. 她对我们非常热心。
三.巩固练习
1. The modern machine proved ______ in heart surgery.
a. high valuable b. highly valuable c. valuable high d. valuable highly
2. Mr. Johnson and his ______ daughter do not always understand each other.
a. older b. the oldest c. eldest d. the eldest
3. They ______ thought that the truth would be finally discovered.
a. little b. not c. small d. bit
4. They hardly believe that the apartment which costs them $ 4,000 is ______.
a. so small b. such little c. so little d. such small
5. If a claim is kept ______, it is more likely to be recognized.
a. live b. lived c. alive d. living
6. On his way to school he met ______, so he sent him to hospital.
a. very ill man b. much sick man c. serious ill man d. very sick man
7. She was operated a month ago but now she was ______.
a. very good b. very well c. healthy d. good conditioned
8. What I would do is to go ______.
a. really quietly somewhere b. somewhere quietly really
c. really quiet somewhere d. somewhere really quiet
9. The chairman asked ______ to write their questions on a piece of paper and send them to the front.
a. the present members b. the members presently
c. the members present d. the presently members
10. The price was very reasonable; I would gladly have paid ______ he asked.
a. three times much as b. three times as many as
c. as three times much as d. three times as much as
11. The trousers are ______, but Tom does not care a bit.
a. too a little small b. a little too small c. a too little small d. a small too little
12. She wore a dress to the party that was far more attractive than ______.
a. other girls b. that of other girls c. the other girls d. those of other girls
13. he can play tennis better than ______ in the class.
a. any boys b. any other boy c. any boy d. any other
14. Kasia is taking her ______ tour of the shops in search of bargains.
a. daily b. day c. day time d. night
15. ______ the child expresses his interest in an activity, the stronger it will become.
a. The more frequent b. The frequenter c. The more frequently d. the frequentlier
16. We’d better wait _______ , Peter and Tom will come very soon.
a. a little longer b. more longer c. long d. as longer
17. although the medicine tastes ______, it seems to help my condition.
a. bad b. badly c. too much bad d. too badly
18. When she got her first month salary, Diana bought herself ______ dress.
a. a cotton , blue …expensive b. an expensive … blue, cotton
c. a blue, expensive … cotton d. a cotton, expensive… blue
19. The doctors have tried ______ to save the life of the wounded soldier.
a. everything possible humanly b. humanly everything possible
c. everything humanly possible d. humanly possible everything
20. I was worried very much because I’ll miss my flight if the bus arrives ______.
44
a. lately b. late c. latter d. more later
四.答案
BCAACDBDCDBDBACAACCB
第11 章 代词
一.概念:
代词是代替名词的词, 按其意义、特征及其在句中的作用分为：人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、反身代词、相互
代词、疑问代词、不定代词和关系代词等。
二.相关知识点精讲
1.人称代词
1)人称代词的人称、数和格，如下表所示。
2)人称代词有主格和宾格之分。通常主格作主语，宾格作宾语。如：
I like table tennis. （作主语）
Do you know him?（作宾语）
3)人称代词还可作表语。作表语时用宾格。如：
---Whos is knocking at the door?
---It’s me.
4)人称代词在than 之后与其他人或事物进行比较时，用主格和宾格都可以。如：
He is older than me.
He is older than I am.
2. 物主代词
1)表示所有关系的代词叫物主代词。物主代词分形容词性物主代词和名词性
物主代词，如下表所示。
45
2)形容词性物主代词的作用相当于形容词，可在句中作定语。例如：
Our teacher is coming to see us.
This is her pencil-box.
3)名词性物主代词的作用相当于名词，在句中可用作主语、宾语和表语。
Our school is here, and theirs is there.（作主语）
--- Is this English-book yours? （作表语）
--- No. Mine is in my bag.
I've already finished my homework. Have you finished yours? （作宾语）
3. 指示代词
指示代词包括：this，that，these，those。
1) this 和these 一般用来指在时间或空间上较近的事物或人，that 和those
则指时间和空间上较远的事物或人，例如：
This is a pen and that is a pencil．
We are busy these days．
In those days the workers had a hard time．
2)有时that 和those 指前面讲到过的事物，this 和these 则是指下面将要讲
到的事物，例如：
I had a cold. That's why I didn't come.
What I want to say is this ; pronunciation is very important in learning English．
3)有时为了避免重复提到的名词，常可用that 或those 代替，例如：
Television sets made in Beijing are just as good as those made in Shanghai．
4)this 在电话用语中代表自己，that 则代表对方。例如：
Hello! This is Mary. Is that Jack speaking?
4. 反身代词
英语中用来表示"我自己"，"你自己"，"他自己"，"我们自己"，"你们自己"
等意义的代词称为反身代词，也有人称之为自身代名词，其形式如表所示。
反身代词可以在句中作宾语，表语，同位语。
1)作宾语，表示动作的承受者就是动作的发出者，主语和宾语指同一个人
或一些人。
He called himself a writer．
Would you please express yourself in English?
2)作表语。
It doesn't matter．I'll be myself soon．
The girl in the news is myself．
3)作主语或宾语的同位语，表示亲自或本人。
I myself washed the clothes．（=I washed the clothes myself.）（作主语同位语）
You should ask the teacher himself．（作宾语同位语）
5. 不定代词
不是指明代替任何特定名词的代词叫做不定代词，在句中可作主语、表
46
语、宾语和定语。现将几个常用的不定代词举例说明如下：
1)some 与any 的区别
①some 多用于肯定句，表示“一些，几个”作形容词时，后面可以接①不可数名词+单数动词；②可数名词+复
数动词。
Look! Some of the students are cleaning the library.
. Some rice in the bag has been sold out.
②any 多用于疑问句、条件句和否定句中，表示“一些，任何”用作形容词时，后面可以接①不可数名词+单数动
词；②可数名词+复数动词。
If you have any questions, please ask me.
There isn't any orange in the bottle.
Have you got any tea?
③any 和some 也可以作代词用，表示“一些”。any 多用于疑问句或否定句中，some 多用于肯定句中。
How many people can you see in the picture?
I can't see any.
If you have no money, I'll lend you some.
注意：与some, any 结合的词如something, somebody, someone, anything, anyone, anybody 在肯定句、
否定句、疑问句、条件句中的用法，大致和some, any 的用法相同。
2) few, a few, little, a little 在用法上的区别
①用作形容词：
含义
用法
表示肯定
表示否定
用于可数名词
a few 虽少，但有几个
few 不多，几乎没有
用于不可数名词
a little，虽少，但有一点
little 不多，没有什么
I'm going to buy a few apples.
He can speak only a little Chinese.
There is only a little milk in the glass.
He has few friends.
They had little money with them.
②a little 和little 也可以用作副词，a little 表示“有点，稍微”，little 表示“很少”。
I'm a little hungry. (修饰形容词hungry)
Let him sleep a little. (修饰动词sleep)
Mary, go a little faster, please. (修饰副词比较级)
She slept very little last night.
3)other, the other, another, others, the others 的区别。
用 法
代名词
形容词
单数
复数
单数
复数
不定
another
另一个
others
别人，其他人
another (boy)
另一个（男孩）
other (boys)
其他男孩
特定
the other
另一个
the others
其余那些人、物
the other (boy)
另一个男孩
the other (boys)
其余那些男孩
①other 可以作形容词用，后面可以跟单数或复数名词，意思是“其他的、别
的”。
Where are his other books?
I haven't any other books except this one.
②other 也可以用作代词，与冠词the 连用构成“the other”，表示两个人或物中的“另一个”。常与one 搭配构成“one ...,
the other ...”句型。
47
He has two brothers. One is 10 years old , the other is 5 years old.
She held a ruler in one hand and an exercise-book in the other.
③other 作代词用时，可以有复数“others”，泛指“另外的人或物”。常与some 搭配构成“some ...., others ...”
句型。
Some went to the cinema, others went swimming.
This coat is too large. Show me some others, please.
④“the others”表示特指某范围内的“其他的人或物”。
We got home by 4 o'clock, but the others didn't get back until 8 o'clock.
In our class only Tom is English, the others are Chinese.
⑤another 可以作形容词用，修饰后面的名词，意为“另一个”，还可以跟代词one.
You can see another ship in the sea, can't you?
Mary doesn't want to buy this skirt. Would you please show her another one?
⑥another 也可以作代词用，表示“另一个”。
I'm still hungry after I've had this cake. Please give me another.
4)every 与each 的区别。
each
every
1)可单独使用
1)不可单独使用
2)可做代名词、形容词
2)仅作形容词
3)着重“个别”
3)着重“全体”，毫无例
外
4)用于两者或两者以上中的每
一个人或物
4)用于三者或三者以上
每一个人或物
The teacher gave a toy to each child.
Each ball has a different colour.
当我们说each child, each student 或each teacher 时，我们想到的是一个人的情况。而当我们说every child
和every student 时，我们想到的是全体的情况，every 的意思与all 接近，表示他们都如此。
Every student loves the English teacher. = All students love the English teacher.
Every child likes playing. = All children like playing.
5)all 和both 的用法。
①all 指三者以上，或不可数的东西。谓语动词既可以用单数，也可以用作复数。在句中作主语、表语、宾语、同
位语和定语。
All of us like Mr Pope. 我们都喜欢Pope 先生。（作主语）
= We all like Mr Pope. (作同位语)
All the water has been used up. (作主语)
That's all for today. (作表语)
Why not eat all (of) the fish? (作宾语)
All the leaders are here. (作定语)
②both 作代词。
a.与其他名词或代词并列出现，表示“两个都”。
Lucy and Lily both agree with us.
They both passed on their sticks at the same time.
How are your parents? They're both fine.
b.与“of +代词（或名词）”连用，表示“两者都”。
Both of them came to see Mary.
Both of the books are very interesting.
c.单独使用，表示“两者（都）”。
48
Michael has two sons. Both are clever.
I don't know which book is the better, I shall read both.
③both 用作形容词，放在名词之前，修饰该名词，表示“两者都”。
Both his younger sisters are our classmates.
. There are tall trees on both sides of the street.
6. 相互代词
表示相互关系的代词叫做相互代词。相互代词有each other 和one another 两种形 式。在当代英语中，each other
和one another 没有什么区别。相互代词可在句中作宾语，定语。作定语用时，相互代词用所有格形式。
We should learn from each other / one another. （作宾语）
Do you often write to each other / one another? （作宾语）
We often borrow each other's / one another's books. （作定语）
The students corrected each other's / one another's mistakes in their homework.
（作定语）
7. 疑问代词
疑问代词有who，whom，whose，what 和which 等。疑问代词用于特殊疑
问句中，一般都放在句首，并在句子中作为某一句子成分。例如：
Who is going to come here tomorrow? （作主语）
What is that? (作表语)
Whose umbrella is this? (作定语)
Whom are you waiting for? (作宾语)
8.关系代词
关系代词是一种引导从句并起连接主句和从句作用的代词。关系代词有 who, whose, whom, that, which. 它们
在句中可用作主语,表语,宾语,定语. 在主句中,它们还代表着从句所修饰的那个名词或代词。例如：
I hate people who talk much but do little.
I’m looking at the photograph which you sent me with your letter.
With the money that he had saved, he went on with his studies.
Do you know the lady who is interviewing our headmaster?
三.巩固练习
1. Tom, Please pass ________ the glasses. I want to read the newspapers.
A. you B. me C. him D. her
2. The English novel is quite easy for you. There are ______ new words in it.
A. a little B. little C. a few D. few
3. ---You want ________ sandwich?
---Yes, I usually eat a lot when I’m hungry.
A. other B. another C. others D. the other
4. The doctors and nurses are doing their best to fight SARS. They think more of others than _______.
A. they B. them C. themselves D. theirs
5. ---Which do you prefer, a bottle of orange or a bottle of milk?
---______________, thanks. I’d like a cup of tea.
A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. None
6. ---Oh! I came in a hurry and forgot to bring food.
---Never mind. You can have ________.
A. us B. ours C. you D. yours
7. ---Can I come this evening or tomorrow morning?
---_______ is OK. I’m free today and tomorrow.
A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. None
49
8. ---How are you going to improve _______ this term?
---Work harder than last term.
A. ourselves B. myself C. himself D. yourself
9. ---Could you tell me _______ she is looking for?
---Her cousin, Susan.
A. that B. whose C. who D. which
10. ---Is _______ here?
---No. Li Lei and Han Mei have asked for leave.
A. everybody B. somebody C. anybody D. nobody
11. Paul has _______ friends except me, and sometimes he feels lonely.
A. many B. some C. few D. more
12. If you want to book a round-trip ticket, you’ll have to pay ______ $ 30.
A. more B. other C. the other D. another
13. ---Do you live by yourself, Mr Wang?
---Yes. I have two sons. But ______ of them lives with me. They are now studying in America?
A. neither B. both C. none D. either
14. ---Have you sent your parents an E-mail telling them you arrived safe?
---No. _______ of them can use a computer.
A. None B. Both C. Neither D. All
15. Who taught _______ English last term? Was _____ Mr. Smith?
A. you; it B. you; he C. your; it D. your; that
16. ---That woman has a bag in her right hand. What’s in her _____ hand?
A. another B. other C. one D. the other
17. We decided to go for a field trip with some friends of _______.
A. us B. our C. ours D. ourselves
18. ---Is there a bus to the zoo?
---I’m afraid there’s _______ bus to the zoo.
A. no B. any C. some D. none
19. You forgot your dictionary? You may have _______.
A. me B. my C. mine D. myself
20. This is ______ classroom. Where is _______?
A. our; them B. us; they C. our; theirs D. ours; theirs
四.答案
1.B 2.D 3.B 4.C 5.B 6.B 7.A 8.D 9.C 10.A 11.C 12.D 13.A 14.C 15.A 16.B 17.C 18.A 19.C 20.C
第12 章 名词
一.概念
名词是表示人,事物,地点或抽象概念的名称的词,有专有名词和普通名词之分,还有可数名词与不可数名词之分.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.名词复数的规则变化
情况
构成方法
读音
例词
一般情况
加 -s
清辅音后读/s/
map-maps
浊辅音和元音后读 /z/
bag-bags /car-cars
以s, sh, ch, x 等结尾 加 -es
读 /iz/
bus-buses/ watch-watches
以ce, se, ze,等结尾
加 -s
读 /iz/
license-licenses
50
以辅音字母+y 结尾
变y 为i 再加es
读 /z/
baby---babies
2.其它名词复数的规则变化
1） 以y 结尾的专有名词，或元音字母+y 结尾的名词变复数时，直接加s 变复数。例如：
two Marys the Henrys
monkey---monkeys holiday---holidays
2） 以o 结尾的名词，变复数时：
a. 加s，如： photo---photos piano---pianos
radio---radios zoo---zoos；
b. 加es，如：potato--potatoes tomato--tomatoes
c. 上述a 和b 两种方法均可，如zero---zeros / zeroes。
3） 以f 或fe 结尾的名词变复数时：
a. 加s，如： belief---beliefs roof---roofs
safe---safes gulf---gulfs；
b. 去f,fe 加ves，如：half---halves
knife---knives leaf---leaves wolf---wolves
wife---wives life---lives thief---thieves；
c. 上述a 和b 两种方法均可，如handkerchief: handkerchiefs / handkerchieves。
3.名词复数的不规则变化
1） child---children foot---feet tooth---teeth
mouse---mice man---men woman---women
注意：由一个词加 man 或 woman 构成的合成词，其复数形式也是 -men 和-women，如an Englishman，two Englishmen。
但German 不是合成词，故复数形式为Germans；Bowman 是姓，其复数是the Bowmans。
2） 单复同形，如deer，sheep，fish，Chinese，Japanese ，li，jin，yuan，two li，three mu，four jin 等。但
除人民币的元、角、分外，美元、英镑、法郎等都有复数形式。如：a dollar, two dollars; a meter, two meters。
3）集体名词，以单数形式出现，但实为复数。例如：
people police cattle 等本身就是复数，不能说 a people，a police，a cattle，但可以说a person，a policeman，
a head of cattle, the English，the British，the French，the Chinese，the Japanese，the Swiss 等名词，表
示国民总称时，作复数用，如The Chinese are industries and brave. 中国人民是勤劳勇敢的。
4） 以s 结尾，仍为单数的名词，如：
a. maths，politics，physics 等学科名词，一般是不可数名词，为单数。
b. news 为不可数名词。
c. the United States，the United Nations 应视为单数。
The United Nations was organized in 1945. 联合国是1945 年组建起来的。
d. 以复数形式出现的书名，剧名，报纸，杂志名，也可视为单数。例如：
"The Arabian Nights" is a very interesting story-book. 《一千零一夜》是一本非常有趣的故事书。
5） 表示由两部分构成的东西，如：glasses （眼镜） trousers, clothes 等，若表达具体数目，要借助数量词 pair
（对，双）; suit（套）; a pair of glasses; two pairs of trousers 等。
6） 另外还有一些名词，其复数形式有时可表示特别意思，如：goods 货物，waters 水域，fishes（各种）鱼。
4. 不可数名词量的表示
1）物质名词
a. 当物质名词转化为个体名词时为可数。
比较：Cake is a kind of food. 蛋糕是一种食物。 （不可数）
These cakes are sweet. 这些蛋糕很好吃。 （可数）
b. 当物质名词表示该物质的种类时，可数。例如：
This factory produces steel. （不可数）
We need various steels. （可数）
51
c. 当物质名词表示份数时，可数。例如：
Our country is famous for tea. 我国因茶叶而闻名。
Two teas, please. 请来两杯茶。
2） 抽象名词表示具体的事例时也可数。例如：
four freedoms 四大自由 the four modernizations 四个现代化
物质名词和抽象名词可以借助单位词表一定的数量，如a glass of water 一杯水/ a piece of advice 一则建议。
5. 定语名词的复数
名词作定语一般用单数，但也有以下例外。
1) 用复数作定语。例如：
sports meeting 运动会 students reading-room 学生阅览室
talks table 谈判桌 the foreign languages department 外语系
2） man, woman, gentleman 等作定语时，其单复数以所修饰的名词的单复数而定。例如：
men workers women teachers gentlemen officials
3） 有些原有s 结尾的名词，作定语时，s 保留。例如：
goods train （货车） arms produce 武器生产
customs papers 海关文件 clothes brush 衣刷
4） 数词+名词作定语时，这个名词一般保留单数形式。例如：
two-dozen eggs 两打鸡蛋 a ten-mile walk 十英里路
two-hundred trees 两百棵树 a five-year plan. 一个五年计划
6. 不同国籍人的单复数
国籍
总称（谓语用复数）
单数
复数
中国人
the Chinese
a Chinese
two Chinese
瑞士人
the Swiss
a Swiss
two Swiss
澳大利亚人
the Australians
an Australian
two Australians
俄国人
the Russians
a Russian
two Russians
意大利人
the Italians
an Italian
two Italians
希腊人
the Greek
a Greek
two Greeks
法国人
the French
a Frenchman
two Frenchmen
日本人
the Japanese
a Japanese
two Japanese
美国人
the Americans
an American
two Americans
印度人
the Indians
an Indian
two Indians
加拿大人
the Canadians
a Canadian
two Canadians
德国人
the Germans
a Germans
two Germans
英国人
the English
an Englishman
two Englishmen
瑞典人
the Swedish
a Swede
two Swedes
7. 名词的格
英语中有些名词可以加"'s"来表示所有关系，带这种词尾的名词形式称为该名词的所有格，如：a teacher's book。
名词所有格的规则如下：
1） 单数名词词尾加"'s"，复数名词词尾没有s，也要加"'s"，如the boy's bag 男孩的书包，men's room 男厕所。
2） 若名词已有复数词尾-s ，只加" ' "，如：the workers' struggle 工人的斗争。
3） 凡不能加"'s"的名词，都可以用"名词+of +名词"的结构来表示所有关系，如：the title of the song 歌的名
字。
4） 在表示店铺或教堂的名字或某人的家时，名词所有格的后面常常不出现它所修饰的名词，如：the barber's 理
发店。
5） 如果两个名词并列，并且分别有's，则表示"分别有"；只有一个's，则表示'共有'。例如：
John's and Mary's rooms（两间） John and Mary's room（一间）
52
6） 复合名词或短语，'s 加在最后一个词的词尾。例如：a month or two's absence
三.巩固练习
1.He was eager to make some extra money, since during these years he could hardly live on his_______.
a． little wage b. few wage c. wage d. wages
2.Most of the houses in the village were burnt to ______ during the war.
a. an ash b. the ash c. ash d. ashes
3.The students at colleges or universities are making ______ for the coming New Year.
a. many preparations b. much preparation c. preparations d. preparation
4.Paiting in _____ is one of their spare-time activities.
a. oil b. an oil c. oils d. the oil
5.In the view of the foreign experts, there wasn’t ____ oil here.
a. much b. lots of c. a great deal of d. many
6.The large houses are being painted, but ______.
a. of great expense b. at a great expense c. in a lot of expenses d. by high expense
7.The room was small and contained far too ______.
a.much new furniture c. much new furnitures
b.many new furniture d. many new furnitures
8.Jim was late for two classes this morning. He said that he forgot both of the ______.
a. rooms number b. room number c. room’s numbers d. room numbers
9.Computers can do ______ work in a short time, but a man can not do ______ by himself.
a great many…many c. much…a great deal
b.great deal of…much d. many…a great many
10.She didn’t know _____ he had been given.
a. how many information c. how many informations
b. the number of information d. how much information
11.He invited all of his ______ to join his wedding party.
a. comrade-in-arms c. comrades-in-arm
b. comrades-in-arms d. comrade-in-arm
12.All the ______ in the hospital got a rise last month.
a. women doctors c. woman doctors
b. women doctor d. woman doctor
13.After ten years, all these youngsters became_____.
a. growns-ups c. growns-up
b. grown-up d. grown-ups
14.The police investigated those _____ about the accident.
a. stander-by c. standers-by
b. stander-bys d. standers-bys
15.The Nazi kept those ______ in their concentration camp.
a.prisoner-of-wars c. prisoners-of-war
b.prisoners-of-wars d. prisoner-of-war
16.The manager was greatly appreciate that _____ made by Linda lately.
a. new reel b. news reel c. new-reels d. news reels
17.Mary’s dress is similar in appearance to her ______.
a. elder sister b. elder sister’s c. elder sisters d. elder sisters dress
18.All the people at the conference are ______.
a. mathematic teachers c. mathematics teacher
53
b.mathematics teachers d. mathematic’s teachers
19.Professor Mackay told us that ______ of lead are its softness and its resistance.
a. some property c. properties
b. some properties d. property
20.Physics _____ with matter and motion.
a. deal b. deals c. dealing d. are
四.答案
DDCCACADCDCADBBBBCCB
第13 章 数词
一.概念:
数词分两类:基数词和序数词.表示数目的词叫基数词,表示须序的词叫序数词.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.基数词
1）基数词一般可写成如345 或three hundred and forty-five。
2）基数词一般是单数形式，但遇下列情况，常用复数：
a. 与of 短语连用，表示概数，不能与具体数目连用，如scores of people 指许多人；
b. 在一些表示"一排"或"一组"的词组里。例如：
They arrived in twos and threes. 他们三三两两的到了。
c. 表示"几十岁"。
d. 表示"年代"，用 in +the +数词复数。
e. 在乘法运算的一种表示法里，如Three fives is（are）fifteen。
2.序数词
序数词的缩写形式如first---1st second---2nd thirty-first---31st等。
3.数词的用法
1）倍数表示法
a. 主语+谓语+倍数（或分数）+ as + adj. + as。例如
I have three times as many as you. 我有你三倍那么多。
b. 主语+谓语+倍数（分数）+ the size （amount，length…） of…。例如：
The earth is 49 times the size of the moon. 地球是月球的49 倍。
c. 主语+谓语+倍数（分数）+ 形容词（副词）比较级+ than…。例如：
The grain output is 8 percent higher this year than that of last year. 今年比去年粮食产量增加8%。
d. 还可以用by+倍数，表示增加多少倍。例如：
The production of grain has been increased by four times this year. 今年粮食产量增加了4 倍。
2）分数表示法的构成：基数词代表分子，序数词代表分母。分子大于1 时，分子的序数词用单数，分母序数词用
复数。例如：
1/3 one-third； 3/37 three and three-sevenths.
三.巩固练习
1.______ martyrs have heroically laid down their lives for the people.
a. Thousand upon thousand of b. Thousand and thousands of
c. Thousands upon thousands of d. Thousand and thousand of
2.They received ______ of letters about their TV programs.
a. dozen b. dozen and dozen c score d. dozens
3.Who is that man,______ in the front row?
a. one b. the one c. first d. the first
54
4.We have produced ______ this year as we did in 1993.
a. as much cotton twice b. as twice much cotton
c. much as twice cotton d. twice as much cotton
5.The earth is about ______ as the moon.
a. as fifty time big b. fifty times as big c. as big fifty time d. fifty as times big
6.The population of many Alaskan cities has ______ in the past three years.
a. more than doubled b. more doubled than c. much than doubled d. much doubled than
7.The moon is about _____ in diameter as diameter as the earth.
a. one-three as large b. one three as large c. one-third as large d. one third as large
8.Five hundred yuan a month _____ enough to live on.
a. is b. are c. is being d. has been
9.______ of the buildings were ruined.
a. Three fourth b. Three four c. Three-fourths d. Three-four
10.Consult _____ for questions about earthquakes.
a. the six index b. index six c. sixth index d. index numbering six
四.答案
CDDDBACACB
第14 章 冠词
一.概念
冠词是一个虚词,它置于名词之前,限定名词的意义.冠词可分为定冠词,不定冠词和零冠词三类.
二.相关知识点精讲
1. a 用于辅音发音开头的词前, 如：a book; an 用于元音发音开头的词前，如：an apple, an hour. 请区别：a
useful machine, an umbrella, a “u”, an “h”。
2.指上文提到过的人或物，用定冠词the。
3.在世界上独一无二的事物前用定冠词the. 如：the sun, the moon, the earth。
4.the 用于序数词，表方位的名词和形容词最高级前。the first, the best , in the south。
5.在复数姓氏前加the，表示××一家人，常看成复数。如：the Browns。
6.在介词短语中常用定冠词the，如：in the box ,behind the chair。
7.不能用定冠词the 的几个方面： (1)在节日、星期、月份、季节、年等词前不用冠词。如：in summer, in August 请
区别：in the spring of 1945. (这里表示特指，故加the)(2)一日三餐和球类运动名不用冠词。如：have
breakfast ,play football
(3)一些固定词组中，如：go to bed ,go to school, by bus ,at night.
8.在有些词组中，有冠词和无冠词意思不同，请注意区别：
in front of 在…前面, in the front of 在…范围内的前部
in hospital (生病)住院, in the hospital 在医院里。
三.巩固练习
1.When Linda was a child, her mother always let her have ______ bed.
a. the breakfast in b. the breakfast in the c. breakfast in d. breakfast in the
2.He has promised to give up ______ hundreds of times.
a. tobacco b. tobacco c. the tobacco d. tobaccos
3.______ usually go to church every Sunday.
a. The Brown b. A Brown c. Browns d. The Browns
4.The train is running fifty miles ______.
a. an hour b. one hour c. the hour d. a hour
55
5.He can play almost every kind of music instrument but he is good ______.
a.at the flute b. at flute c. at a flute d. at that flute
6.The investigators found that more should be done for ______ in India.
a.those poor b. a poor c. poor d. the poor
7.You look in high spirit. You must have ______ during your holiday.
a. wonderful time b. a wonderful time c. the wonderful time d. some wonderful time
8.The city assigned a policeman to the school crossing because ______ traffic there was so heavy.
a .a b. an c. the d. one
9.A new teacher was sent to the village in place of ______ one who had retired.
a. a b. the c. an d. its
10.Virtue and vice are before you;______ leads you to happiness,______ to misery.
a. the former…latter b. a former…a latter
c. the former…the latter d. former…latter
四.答案
CBDAADBCBC
第15 章 介词
一.概念:
介词表示它后面的名词或相当于名词的其他结构与句中其他成分的关系.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.表示地点位置的介词
1)at ,in, on, to
at (1)表示在小地方; (2)表示“在……附近，旁边”
in (1)表示 在大地方; (2)表示“在…范围之内”。
on 表示毗邻，接壤
to 表示在……范围外，不强调是否接壤
He arrived at the station at ten.
He is sitting at the desk.
He arrived in Shanghai yesterday.
Jiangsu lies in the east of China.
Russia lies on the north of China.
Fujian is to the south of Jiangsu Province.
2)above, over, on 在……上
above 指在……上方,不强调是否垂直，与 below 相对；
over 指垂直的上方,与under 相对,但over 与物体有一定的空间，不直接接触。
on 表示某物体上面并与之接触。
The bird is flying above my head.
There is a bridge over the river.
He put his watch on the desk.
3)below, under 在……下面
under 表示在…正下方
below 表示在……下，不一定在正下方
There is a cat under the table.
Please write your name below the line.
2.表示时间的介词
56
1)in , on，at 在……时
in 表示较长时间，如世纪、朝代、时代、年、季节、月及一般（非特指）的早、中、晚等。
如 in the 20th century, in the 1950s, in 1989, in summer, in January, in the morning, in the night,
in one’s life , in one’s thirties 等。
on 表示具体某一天及其早、中、晚。
如on May 1st, on Monday, on New Year’s Day, on a cold night in January, on a fine morning, on
Sunday afternoon 等。
at 表示某一时刻或较短暂的时间，或泛指圣诞节，复活节等。
如at 3:20, at this time of year, at the beginning of, at the end of …, at the age of …, at Christmas，
at night, at noon, at this moment 等。
注意：在last, next, this, that, some, every 等词之前一律不用介词。如：We meet every day.
2)in, after 在……之后
“in +段时间”表示将来的一段时间以后；
“after+段时间”表示过去的一段时间以后；
“after+将来点时间”表示将来的某一时刻以后。
My mother will come back in three or four days.
He arrived after five months.
She will appear after five o’clock this afternoon.
3)from, since 自从……
from 仅说明什么时候开始，不说明某动作或情况持续多久；
since 表示某动作或情况持续至说话时刻，通常与完成时连用。
He studied the piano from the age of three.
They have lived here since 1978.
4)after, behind 在……之后
after 主要用于表示时间；
behind 主要用于表示位置。
We shall leave after lunch.
Lucy is hiding behind an old house.
3.表运动方向的介词：across, through 通过，穿过
across 表示横过,即从物体表面通过，与on 有关；
through 穿过,即从物体内部穿过，与in 有关。
She swam across the river.
He walked through the forest.
4.表示“在……之间”的介词：between, among
between 指在两个人或两个事物之间；
among 指在三个或三个以上的人或事物之间。
There is a football match between Class One and Class Two on the playground.
The teacher is standing among the students.
5.表示其他意义的介词
1)on ,about 关于
on 表示这本书，这篇文章或演说是严肃的，或学术性的，可供专门研究这一问题的人阅读；
about 表示内容较为普通，不那么正式。
There will be a lecture on economics this afternoon.
He is writing a book on cooking.
He told me a lot about his life in the summer vocation.
2)by, with, in 表示方法、手段、工具
57
by 以……方法、手段或泛指某种交通工具；
with 表示用 …工具、手段，一般接具体的工具和手段；
in 表示用…方式，用…语言(语调、笔墨、颜色)等；
He makes a living by selling newspapers.
He broke the window with a stone.
The foreigner spoke to us in English.
3)except, besides 除了
except 除……之外，不包括在内；
besides 除……之外，包括在内。
Except Mr. Wang, we went to see the film.(王先生没去)
Besides Mr. Wang, we also went to see the film.(王先生也去了)
三.巩固练习
1. Taiwan is ________ the southeast of China.（in, on, to）
2. Go _________ the bridge _________ the river, you’ll find the shop.（across, through; over, above）
3. I go to school __________7:30 every morning.（in, on, at）
4. He would like to meet her __________8:00 and 9:00 tomorrow morning.（between, among ）
5. The Greens have lived in China ________ three years.（in, for, after）
6. We go to school every day ________ Saturday and Sunday.（except, besides）
7. He wrote the letter _________ ink.（by, with ,in）
8. She returned to her country _________five years.（in, after, for）
9. There is a big tree _________ our classroom.（after, behind）
10. I usually go to work _________ bike.（by, on, with）
四.答案
1.in 2.across, over 3.at, 4.between 5.for 6.except 7.in 8.after 9.behind 10.by
第16 章 连词
一.概念
连词是用来连接词,短语,从句或句子的词.连词不作成分.
二.相关知识点精讲
1.表示并列关系的连词有：and, both…and…, not only… but also…和neither…nor…等
1)and：和，并且
A：基本用法：
“and”表示 “和”、“并且”的意思，用来连接对等关系的字和字，片语和片语，句子和句子。
I enjoy basketball , football and table tennis.
The weather becomes colder and colder.
B:特别用法：
祁使句后连接and，有条件句作用，此时and=if you…,you’ll…
Go straight on, and you’ll see the library.==If you go straight on, you will see the library.
2)both…and…既…也…,(两者)都…
A、both…and…构成的词组作主语时,谓语动词用复数。
Both Jim and Kate are from England.
B、both…and…否定句表示部分否定。
You can’t speak both German and English.
Both my father and my mother aren’t doctors.
3)neither…nor…:既不…也不…
58
neither…nor…连接两个并列主语时,谓语动词靠近哪个主语就与哪个主语保持 “人称”和 “数”的一致，即采取
就近原则。
Neither I nor he has seen the play before.
4)not only…but also…:不但…而且…
not only…but also…连接两个主语后的谓语动词也遵循就近原则。
Not only the mother but also the children are ill.
2.表示转折关系的连词有：but, however, yet, still，while 等。
Mary was a nice girl, but she had one shortcoming.
Tom got up early, yet he failed to catch the train.
He was very tired, still he kept on walking.
Your composition is fairly good, however, there is still some
room for improvement.
Jane is hard working ,while her sister is quite lazy.
3.表示选择关系的并列连词有：or, either…or…,whether… or…等。
1)or：或、否则
A:基本用法
or 表示 “或” 的意思，使用于两者之中选择一个的时候。
----Is your friend English or American? ----American.
He doesn’t like dumplings or noodles.
B:特别用法
祁使句后连接or ，表 “如果…,否则…”,有转折的意思，此时 or =if you don’t …,you’ll …
Hurry up, or you’ll be late.=If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late.
2)either…or…:或者…或者…; 不是…就是…；要么…要么…
A. either…or…连接两个并列主语时,谓语动词靠近哪个主语就与哪个主语保持 “人称”和 “数”的一致，即就近
原则。
Either you or I am right.
Does either she or they like English?
B. 由either…or…引导的否定句是完全否定。
She isn’t either a student or a teacher.
3)whether…or…不管…还是…
She is always cheerful, whether at home or at school.
4.表示因果关系的并列连词有：for(因为)，so(所以)。
He is not at school today, for he has a bad cold.
It was late, so I went home.
5.引导时间状语从句的从属连词有：before, after, when, while, as, till, until, since, as soon as 等。
After they had planted their crops, they took a rest.
We have learned six lessons since he began to teach us.
As soon as he gets to Beijing, he’ll call me.
1) when, while, as 都表示“当……时”，when 从句谓语动词既可以是瞬间动词也可以是延续性动词，可用于主从
句动作同时发生或从句动作先于主句动作发生。while 从句谓语动词只能是延续性动词，侧重主从句动作同时发生。
as 引导一个持续性动作，多用于主从句动作同时发生，强调“一边……一边”。
When I came in, my father was cooking.
I came in when/while my father was cooking.
He sang as he walked.
2)until 用法：当主句谓语动词是延续性动词时，主从句都用肯定式，译为“直到……为止”；当主句谓语动词是瞬间
动词时，主句用否定式，从句用肯定式，即not…..until, 译为“直到……才”。
59
Mr. Green waited until his children came back.(格林先生一直等到他的孩子们回来)
Mr. Green didn’t go to bed until his children came back. (格林先生直到他的孩子们回来才睡觉)
6. 引导条件状语从句的从属连词有：if(如果), unless(除非，如果……不)等。
If you don’t go soon, you’ll be late.=Unless you go soon, you’ll be late.
7.引导原因状语从句的从属连词有 because, as, since 等。
because“因为”语气最强,回答why 提问时只能用because，其引导的从句可放在句首或句末；as“由于”、since
“既然”语气不如because 强，引导的从句常置于句首；for 是并列连词，语气最弱，对前面分句加以解释或补充
说明，其引导的分句常置于句末且用逗号隔开。
He didn’t go to school because he was ill.
As it was raining, we went there by bus.
Since everybody is here, let’s begin.
It must have rained last night, for the ground is wet.
注意： because 与 so 不能同时使用。
8.引导让步状语从句的从属连词有：although/though(虽然，尽管), even though/if (即使)
Although/ Though it is a very young country, it is very rich.
Even if/ though you were here yesterday, you couldn’t help him.
注意：although/though 引导的从句不能与but 连用，但可与yet, still 连用。
9.引导目的状语从句的从属连词有so that 和in order that(以便，为了)等。
The teacher spoke loudly so that /in order that we could hear him clearly.
10.引导结果状语从句的从属连词有：so that(结果是)和so/such…that…(如此…以至于)等。
It was very cold, so that the water in the bowl froze.
He got there so early that he got a good seat.
It is such a heavy box that nobody can move it.
11.引导比较状语从句的从属连词有： as…as…(与……一样),not as/so… as…(不及，赶不上),和than(比)等。
I know you better than she does.
He works as carefully as she.
I can’t run as/so fast as you.
12.引导名词性从句的从属连词有：that 和 if/whether(是否)等。
We know that the earth goes around the sun.(宾语从句)
I wonder if he has received my e-mail. (宾语从句)
Whether he’ll go there hasn’t been decided.(主语从句)
注意：在时间状语从句和条件状语从句中，如果主句是将来时，从句要用一般现在时。
I’ll go on with the work when I come back tomorrow.
He won’t come unless he is invited.
三.巩固练习
1、I don’t like reading watching TV. What about you? “I don’t like reading all day, I like
watching TV plays.”
A．and, but
B．and, and
C．or, and
2、You won’t know the value(价值) of the health you lose it.
A．until
B．after
C．when
D．because
3、We bought Granny a present, she didn’t like it.
A．but
B．and
C．or
4、Study hard, you will pass the exam.
A．so
B．for
C．but
5、Put on more clothes, you’ll catch cold.
A．and
B．for
C．or
60
6、My shoes are worn out, I need new ones.
A．so
B．if
C．because
7、He ran fast he won the race.
A．enough …to B．so …that
C．too…to
D．both…and
8、He is only ten months. He can read write.
A．either…or
B．neither…nor
C．both…and
D．so…that
9、She said she might come Saturday Sunday .
A．neither…nor
B．nither…or
C．too…to
D．so…that
10、If Tom Mike asks for their car, tell him to come tomorrow.
A．or
B．and
C．with
11、It was already ten o’clock we got to the museum this morning.
A．that
B．when
C．if
D．for
12、It’s a long time we met last.
A．so
B．after
C．since
D．before
13、That maths problem is difficult nobody can do it.
A．too…to
B．very…that
C．so…that
D．very …but
14、I’ll give her the message she comes back.
A．since
B．before
C．until
D．as soon as
15、 the teacher came into the classroom, many students were talking to each other.
A．While
B．If
C．Since
D．When
16、People often mistake us for each other we are twins.
A．if
B．when
C．because
D．after
17、Could you tell me in your home town in winter?
A．if it often snowed
B．whether does it often snow
C．if it often snow
D．whether it often snows
18、Are you sure Mr. Li will come to your birthday party?
A．if
B．that
C．for
19、 Lily Lucy like singing.
A．Either…or
B．Beither…nor …
C．Both…and
D．So…that
20、Read the sentences slowly we can understand what you read.
A．so that
B．before
C．until
四.答案
1、D
2、A
3、A
4、D
5、C
6、A
7、B
第17 章 构词法
一.概念
英语的构词法主要有:合成法,转化法,派生法,混成法,截短法和词首字母缩略法.
61
二.相关知识点精讲
1.转化法
英语中，有的名词可作动词，有的形容词可作副词或动词，这种把一种词性用作另一种词性而词形不变的方法叫
作转化法。
1)动词转化为名词
很多动词可以转化为名词，大多意思没有多大的变化(如下①)；有时意思有一定变化(如下②)；有的与一个动词
和不定冠词构成短语，表示一个动作(如下③)。例如：
①Let's go out for a walk.我们到外面去散散步吧。
②He is a man of strong build.他是一个体格健壮的汉子。
③Let's have a swim.咱们游泳吧。
2)名词转化为动词
很多表示物件(如下①)、身体部位(如下②)、某类人(如下③)的名词可以用作动词来表示动作，某些抽象名词(如
下④)也可作动词。例如：
①Did you book a seat on the plane?你订好飞机座位了吗?
②Please hand me the book.请把那本书递给我。
③She nursed her husband back to health.她看护丈夫，使他恢复了健康。
④We lunched together.我们在一起吃了午餐。
3)形容词转化为动词
有少数形容词可转化为动词。例如：
We will try our best to better our living conditions.我们要尽力改善我们生活状况。
4)副词转化为动词
有少数副词可以转化为动词。例如：
Murder will out.(谚语)恶事终必将败露。
5)形容词转化为名词
表示颜色的形容词常可转化为名词(如下①)；某些形容词如old, young, poor, rich, wounded, injured 等与the
连用，表示一类人，作主语时，谓语用复数(如下②)。例如：
You should be dressed in black at the funeral.你在葬礼中该穿黑色衣服。
The old in our village are living a happy life.我们村的老年人过着幸福的生活。
2.派生法
在词根前面加前缀或在词根后面加后缀构成一个与原单词意义相近或截然相反的新词叫作派生法。
1)前缀
除少数前缀外，前缀一般改变单词的意义，不改变词性；后缀一般改变词类，而不引起词义的变化。
(1)表示否定意义的前缀常用的有dis-, il-, im-, in-, ir-, mis-, non-, un-等，在单词的前面加这类前缀常
构成与该词意义相反的新词。例如：
appear 出现→disappear 消失
correct 正确的→incorrect 不正确的
lead 带领→mislead 领错
stop 停下→non-stop 不停
(2)表示其他意义的前缀常用的有a-(多构成表语形容词), anti- (反对；抵抗), auto- (自动), co- (共同), en-
(使), inter- (互相), re- (再；又), sub- (下面的；次；小), tele- (强调距离)等。例如：
alone 单独的antigas 防毒气的
autochart 自动图表
cooperate 合作enjoy 使高兴
internet 互联网reuse 再用
subway 地铁telephone 电话
62
2)后缀
英语单词不仅可以通过加前缀构成新词，也可加后缀构成新词。后缀通常会改变单词的词性，构成意义相近的其
他词性；少数后缀还会改变词义，变为与原来词义相反的新词。
(1)构成名词的后缀常用的有-ence，-(e)r/ -or (从事某事的人),-ese (某地人)，-ess (雌性)，-ful (一……)，
-ian (精通……的人)，-ist (专业人员)，-ment (性质；状态)，-ness (性质；状态)，-tion(动作；过程)等。例如：
differ 不同于→difference 区别
write 写→writer 作家
Japan 日本→Japanese 日本人
act 表演→actress 女演员
mouth 口→mouthful 一口
music 音乐→musician 音乐家
(2)构成动词的后缀常用的有-(e)n (多用于形容词之后)，-fy (使……化)，-ize (使……成为)。例如：
wide→widen 加宽
beauty→beautify 美化
pure→purify 提纯
real→realize 意识到
organ→organize 组织
(3)构成形容词的后缀常用的有-al，
-able (有能力的)，-(a)n(某国人的)，-en (多用于表示材料的名词后)，-ern (方向的)，-ese(某国人的)，-ful，
-(ic)al，-ish，-ive，-less (表示否定)，-like (像……的)，-ly，-ous，-some，-y (表示天气)等。例如：
nature 自然→natural 自然的
reason 道理→reasonable 有道理的
America 美国→American 美国的
China 中国→Chinese 中国人的
gold 金子→golden 金的
east 东→eastern 东方的
child 孩子→childish 孩子气的
snow 雪→snowy 雪的
(4)构成副词的常用后缀有-ly (主要用于形容词之后表示方式或程度)，-ward(s) (主要用于表示方位的词之后表
示方向)。例如：
angry 生气的→angrily 生气地
to 到→towards 朝……，向……
east 东方→eastward 向东
(5)构成数词的后缀有-teen (十几)，-ty (几十)，-th (构成序数词)。例如：
six 六→sixteen 十六→sixteenth 第十六
four 四→forty 四十→fortieth 第四十
3.合成法
1)合成名词
构成方式例词
名词＋名词weekend 周末
名词＋动词daybreak 黎明
名词＋动名词handwriting 书法
名词＋及物动词＋er／or pain-killer 止痛药
名词＋介词＋名词editor-in-chief 总编辑
代词＋名词she-wolf 母狼
63
动词＋名词typewriter 打字机
动名词＋名词reading-room 阅览室
现在分词＋名词flying-fish 飞鱼
形容词＋名词gentleman 绅士
副词＋动词outbreak 爆发
介词＋名词afternoon 下午
2)合成形容词
名词＋形容词snow-white 雪白的
名词＋现在分词English-speaking 讲英语的
名词＋to＋名词face-to-face 面对面的
名词＋过去分词man-made 人造的
数词＋名词one-way 单行的
数词＋名词＋形容词two-year-old 两岁的
数词＋名词＋ed five-storeyed 五层的
动词＋副词see-through 透明的
形容词＋名词high-class 高级的
形容词＋名词＋ed noble-minded 高尚的
形容词＋形容词light-blue 浅蓝色的
形容词＋现在分词good-looking 相貌好看的
副词＋形容词ever-green 常青的
副词＋现在分词hard-working 勤劳的
副词＋过去分词well-known 著名的
副词＋名词fast-food 专门提供快餐服务的
介词＋名词downhill 下坡的
3)合成动词
名词＋动词sleep-walk 梦游
形容词＋动词white-wash 粉刷
副词＋动词overthrow 推翻
4)合成副词
形容词＋名词hotfoot 匆忙地
形容词＋副词everywhere 到处
副词＋副词however 尽管如此
介词＋名词beforehand 事先
介词＋副词forever 永远
5)合成代词
代词宾格＋self herself 她自己
物主代词＋self myself 我自己
形容词＋名词anything 任何东西
6)合成介词
副词＋名词inside 在……里面
介词＋副词within 在……之内
副词＋介词into 进入
4.截短法(缩略法)
截短法，即将单词缩写，词义和词性保持不变，主要有截头、去尾、截头去尾等形式。
1)截头
64
telephone→phone
aeroplane→plane
omnibus→bus
2)去尾
mathematics→maths
co-operate→co-op
examination→exam
kilogram→kilo
laboratory→lab
taxicab→taxi
3)截头去尾
influenza→flu
refrigerator→fridge
prescription→script
5.混合法(混成法)
混合法，即将两个词混合或各取一部分紧缩而成一个新词。后半部分表示主体；前半部分表示属性。
news broadcast→newscast 新闻广播
television broadcast→telecast 电视播送
smoke and fog→smog 烟雾
helicopter airport→heliport 直升飞机场
6.首尾字母缩略法
首尾字母缩略法，即用单词首尾字母组成一个新词。读音主要有两种形式，即各字母分别读音；作为一个单词读
音。
very important person→VIP (读字母音)要人；大人物
television→TV (读字母音)电视
Testing of English as a Foreign Language→TOEFL 托福
Nato
三.巩固练习
1.That man was________enough not to tell the manager that he would not do the job.
A.care
B.careful
C.careless
D.carelessness
2.The soldier died for saving the child，so his________ is heavier than Mount Tai.
A.die
B.dead
C.died
D.death
3.The child looked________at his brother who was badly wounded.
A.sadly
B.sadness
C.sadly
D.sad
4.He is an expert at chemistry.We all call him a ________.
A.chemistry
B.chemical
C.chemist
D.physician
5.The three- ________chair isn’t suitable for a young child.He may fall off.
A.legging
B.legged
C.legs
D.le
6.Stephenson became the________railway engineer in the world.
A.lead
B.leader
C.leading
D.leadership
65
7.When the teacher praised him for working out the maths problem，Jack looked________about at his
classmates.
A.proud
B.proudly
C.pride
D.pridely
8.To everyone’s ________，the girl finished the job quite well.
A.satisfied
B.satisfactory
C.satisfying
D.satisfaction
9.—What are you doing here?
—Oh，my teacher asked me to write a passage about ________in English.
—You can write________passage in English?
A.600 words；a 600-words
B.600-word；a 600-words
C.600 words；a 600-word
D.600 words；a 600-words
10.No one should enter the spot without the________of the police.
A.permit
B.permission
C.permitting
D.permittence
11.You must come with us to the police ________.Our head is waiting for you.
A.headquarters
B.headline
C.headmaster
D.headache
12.Letting that animal escape was no accident；you did it ________.
A.intend
B.intention
C.intentionally
D.intentional
13.The shop owner welcomed all the guests with a________smile.
A.practice
B.practise
C.practical
D.practiced
14.The________ordered him to pay a $100 fine.
A.judger
B.judgment
C.judge
D.judgement
15.My TV is out of order.Can you tell me what is the________news about Iraq War?
A.lately
B.latest
C.later
D.latter
16.The Great Wall is more than 6000 li in ________.
A.longer
B.length
C.long
D.longing
17.To my ________，I passed the exam easily.
A.joy
B.joyful
C.joyless
D.joyness
18.Canada is mainly an________country.
A.English-speaking
B.speak-English
C.spoken-English
D.English-spoken
19.How________ he is! He is always acting________.He is really a ________.
A.foolish；foolishly；fool
B.fool；foolish；fool
C.foolish；fool；fool
D.foolishly；foolish；fool
66
20.The necklace that she lost is very expensive.It’s of great ________.
A.valuable
B.value
C.valueless
D.unvaluable
21.There were________fish in the river in South America.
A.in danger
B.danger
C.dangerous
D.dangerless
22.The letter “b” in the word “doubt” is________.
A.sound
B.silent
C.silence
D.sounded
23.The child looked at me________.
A.stranger
B.strangely
C.strange
D.strangeless
24.The black people were against slavery and fought for their________bravely.
A.free
B.freely
C.freedom
D.frees
25.What you said sounded________ but in fact it was untrue.
A.reasonable
B.reasonful
C.reasonless
D.unreason
26.We have to learn________technology from other countries.
A.advance
B.advancing
C.advantage
D.advanced
27.The children live in a village ________.They come here almost every day.
A.nearby
B.near
C.nearly
D.near by
28.Mr Black is an ________in the army，not an________in the government.You can not easily find him in
his________.
A.official；officer；office
B.officer；office；official
C.official；official；official
D.officer；official；office
29.You’d better give up smoking if you want to keep ________.
A.health
B.healthy
C.healthily
D.healthier
30.________ speaking，I didn’t do it on purpose.
A.Honestly
B.Honest
C.Honesty
D.Dishonest
四.答案
1-5 BDACB
6-10 CBDCB 11-15 ACDCB
16-20 BAAAB
21-25 CBBCA
26-30 DADBA
高中英语语法大全
学习提纲
67
时态
一、词类、句子成分和构词法：
1、词类：英语词类分十种：
名词、形容词、代词、数词、冠词、动词、副词、介词、连词、感叹词。
1、名词(n.)： 表示人、事物、地点或抽象概念的名称。如：boy, morning, bag, ball, class, orange.
2、代词(pron.)： 主要用来代替名词。如：who, she, you, it .
3、形容词(adj..)：表示人或事物的性质或特征。如：good, right, white, orange .
4、数词(num.)： 表示数目或事物的顺序。如：one, two, three, first, second, third, fourth.
5、动词(v.)： 表示动作或状态。如：am, is,are,have,see .
6、副词(adv.)： 修饰动词、形容词或其他副词,说明时间、地点、程度等。如：now, very, here, often, quietly, slowly.
7、冠词(art..)：用在名词前,帮助说明名词。如：a, an, the.
8、介词(prep.)： 表示它后面的名词或代词与其他句子成分的关系。如in, on, from, above, behind.
9、连词(conj.)： 用来连接词、短语或句子。如and, but, before .
10、感叹词(interj..)表示喜、怒、哀、乐等感情。如：oh, well, hi, hello.
2、句子成分：英语句子成分分为七种：主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语、表语、宾语补足语。
1、主语是句子所要说的人或事物,回答是“谁”或者“什么”。通常用名词或代词担任。如：I’m Miss Green.(我是格
林小姐)
2、谓语动词说明主语的动作或状态,回答“做(什么)”。主要由动词担任。如：Jack cleans the room every day. (杰克每
天打扫房间)
3、表语在系动词之后,说明主语的身份或特征,回答是“什么”或者“怎么样”。通常由名词、代词或形容词担任。如：
My name is Ping ping .(我的名字叫萍萍)
4、宾语表示及物动词的对象或结果,回答做的是“什么”。通常由名词或代词担任。如：He can spell the word.(他能拼
这个词)
有些及物动词带有两个宾语,一个指物,一个指人。指物的叫直接宾语,指人的叫间接宾语。间接宾语一般放在直
接宾语的前面。如：He wrote me a letter . (他给我写了一封信)
有时可把介词to 或for 加在间接宾语前构成短语,放在直接宾语后面,来强调间接宾语。如：He wrote a letter to
me . (他给我写了一封信)
5、定语修饰名词或代词,通常由形容词、代词、数词等担任。如：
Shanghai is a big city .(上海是个大城市)
6、状语用来修饰动词、形容词、副词,通常由副词担任。如：He works hard .(他工作努力)
7、宾语补足语用来说明宾语怎么样或干什么,通常由形容词或动词充当。如：They usually keep their classroom
clean.(他们通常让教室保持清洁) / He often helps me do my lessons.(他常常帮我做功课) / The teacher wanted
me to learn French all by myself.(老师要我自学法语)
☆同位语通常紧跟在名词、代词后面,进一步说明它情况。如：Where is your classmate Tom ?(你的同学汤姆在哪里？)
3、构词法：英语构词法主要有：合成法、派生法和转换法。
1、合成法：如：spaceship, headache, basketball, playground 等等。
2、派生法：
(1)派生名词：①动词+er/or ②动词+ing ③动词+(t)ion ④形容词+ness ⑤其他,如：inventor, learner, swimming,
congratulation, kindness, carelessness, knowledge
(2)派生形容词：①名词+y ②名词+ful ③动词+ing/ed ④friendly ⑤dangerous ⑥Chinese; Japanese ⑦English
⑧French ⑨German ⑩国名+(i)an 如：snowy, sunny, hopeful, beautiful, interesting, follwing, daily(每日
的),nervous, delicious
(3)派生副词：①形容词+ly ②其它,如：slowly, angrily, full→fully, good→well, possible→possibly 等等。
3、转换法：
(1)形容词→动词,如：dry(干燥的)→dry(弄干), clean(干净的)→clean(打扫,弄干净),等等。
(2)动词→名词,如：look, walk, rest, work, study, swim, go, talk 等等。
(3)名词→动词,如：hand(手)→(传递),face(脸)→(面对)等等。
(4)形容词→副词,如：early→early, fast→fast 等等。
(5)副词→连词,如：when(什么时候)→(当……时候),等等。
(6)介词→副词,如：in(到……里)→(在里面；在家),on(在…上)→(进行,继续),等等。
68
二、名词：
1、英语名词可分专有名词和普通名词两大类：
1、专有名词是个别的人、地、物、团体、机构等专用名称。
专有名词中实词的第一个字母要大写。
如：Beijing, Tom, the People’s Republic of China(中华人民共和国)
专有名词如果是含有普通名词的短语,则必须使用定冠词the。如：the Great Wall(长城)
姓氏名如果采用复数形式,则表示该姓氏一家人(复数含义),如：the Greens( 格林一家人)。
2、普通名词是许多人或事物的共有名称。如：pupil, family, man, foot.
普通名词又分为可数名词和不可数名词。
▲可数名词是可以用简单的数词进行计数的名词,如： box, child, orange；
▲不可数名词是不可以用简单的数词进行计数的名词。如：water, news, oil, population, information .
2、英语可数名词的单复数：英语可数名词有单数和复数两种形式。
1、名词由单数变复数的基本方法如下：
①在单数名词词尾加s。如：map → maps,boy→ boys,horse→ horses, table→ tables.
②s,o,x ,sh,ch 结尾的词加es.如：class→classes, box→boxes, hero→heroes, dish→dishes, bench→benches.
[注]：少数以o 结尾的词,变复数时只加s。如：photo→photos, piano→pianos.
③以辅音字母加y 结尾的名词,变y 为i,再加es。如：family→families, city→cities, party→parties.
④以f 或fe 结尾的名词,变f 或fe 为v,再加es。如：shelf→shelves, wolf→wolves, life→lives, knife→knives.
2、不规则变化：man→men, woman→women, sheep→sheep,tooth→teeth, fish→fish, child→children, ox→oxen, goose
→geese
不可数名词一般没有复数形式,说明其数量时,要用有关计量名词。如：a bag of rice→two bags of rice, a piece of paper
→three pieces of paper, a bottle of milk→five bottles of milk.
3、名词所有格：
1、 名词所有格表示所属关系,相当于物主代词,在句中作定语、宾语或主语。其构成法如下：
(1)表示人或其它有生命的东西的名词常在词尾加’s。如：Childern’s Day(儿童节), my sister’s book(我姐姐的书)
(2)以s 或es 结尾的复数名词。只在词尾加’。如：Teachers’ Day(教师节)
(3)有些表示时间、距离以及世界、国家、城镇等无生命的名词,也可在词尾加’s. 如：
today’s newspaper(今天的报纸), ten minutes’ break(十分钟的课间休息),
China’s population(中国的人口).
(4)无论表示有生命还是无生命的东西名词,一般均可用介词of 短语来表示所有关系。如：
a fine daughter of the Party(党的好女儿).
2、[注解]：
① ‘s 还可以表示某人的家或者某个店铺,如：my aunt’s(我阿姨家), the doctor’s(诊所)
② 两人共有某物时,可以采用 A and B’s 的形式,如：Lucy and Lily’s bedroom(露西和丽丽合住的卧室)
③ “of+名词所有格/名词性物主代词”,称为双重所有格,如：a friend of my father’s(我父亲的一位朋友), a friend of
mine(我的一位朋友)
4、名词或代词作主语时和谓语之间的单复数的一致问题：
1、谓语和谓语基本保持单复数的一致,即：主语是可数名词单数或不可数名词时,谓语动词用单数形式：如：The
computer was a great invention.(计算机是个了不起的发明)The water in the glass is very cold.(玻璃杯里的水很冷)
2、集体名词(如family, class, team, group, row, police, school 等)做句子主语时,
① 如果表示整体概念,则谓语用单数形式,如：Class Three is a very good class.(三班是好班)
② 如果表示其中的所有成员时,则谓语用复数形式,如：Class Three have a map of China.(三
班有张中国地图)
3、Chinese, Japanese, fish, sheep, people 等表示单个时谓语用单数,表示许多时,谓语用复数。如：There is a sheep in the
yard.(院子里有只绵羊) / There are some sheep in the yard.(院子里有一些绵羊)
4、maths, news 等虽然有s 结尾,但不是复数,因此谓语仍用单数：The news is very exciting. (这个消息令人兴奋)
5、glasses, shoes, socks, trousers, gloves 等名词往往用复数形式,故谓语用复数。如：
The trousers are very cheap and I want to take them.(裤子很便宜,我想买)
6、a lot of 后跟名词复数时谓语用复数形式,跟不可数名词时谓语用单数形式。如：A lot of students are playing
baseball now.(现在有许多学生在打垒球) A lot of time was wasted on that work.(大量的时间花在了那个工作
上)(被动句)
7、and 连接两个名词做主语时,谓语原则上用复数,但是两个名词若构成一个整体事物时,谓语则用单数。如：The
69
teacher and his son are picking apples now.(老师和他的儿子在摘苹果) / Fish and chips is very famous food. (鱼
和薯条是一种出名的食品)
8、 there be 句型中be 的单复数一般由靠近的名词决定。如：There is a table and four chairs in the room.(房间里有一
张桌子和四张椅子)
9、用both…and…连接两个事物做主语时,谓语一般用复数。如：Both you and I are required to be here tomorrow.(你
和我明天要求都来)
10、主语中含有with 的短语时,谓语单复数由with 之前的人物决定。如：A woman with a 7-year-old child was standing
at the side of the road. (一名妇女带着一个七岁的孩子(当时)就站在路边)
11、either…or…或者 neither…nor…连接两个人物做句子主语时,谓语采用就近原则。如：Either you or he is right.(要
么是你对,要么是他对。/你和他有一个人是对的) / Neither you nor I am going there.(你和我都不打算去那
里)
12、表示一段时间或长度概念的复数名词做主语时,谓语一般用单数。如：Two months is not a short time.(两个月不是
个短时间)Two thousand kilometers is quite a long distance(距离).(两千千米是相当长的一段距离)
13、主语中含有half of… / (three quarters)of… / all (of) the ….等词语时,谓语的单复数由名词确定,如：Over three
quarters of the information on the Internet is in English.(因特网上四分之三以上的信息是用英语写的) / A third of
the students were playing near the lake.(学生的三分之一(当时)正在湖边玩耍) / All of the water in these rivers has
been polluted.(这些河流中的水已经被污染了)(被动句)
但是,population 一词又有特殊情况： What’s the population of China?(中国人口是多少？)(句子用单数) / Three
quarters of the population in this city are Arabs(阿拉伯人).(这个城市四分之三的人口是阿拉伯人)(句子用复数)
5、部分名词用法辨析：
1、sport、game、match、race 的区别：sport 通常指“户外运动”,以锻炼为主,概念较大；game 意思是“运动、
比赛”,不管户内户外还是脑力体力,指以胜负为主的运动；match 意为“竞赛、比赛”,多指正式比赛；race 主要
表示“赛跑、赛马、赛车”。如：People all around the world enjoy sports.(全世界的人都喜爱运动) / The 2008 Olympic
Games will be held in Beijing.(2008 奥运会将在北京举行)(被动句) / Our school football team won the league
match(联赛).(我们学校足球队取得了联赛冠军) / They were strong and won the boat race.(汤他们很棒,赢得了划艇
比赛)
2、festival、holiday、vacation 的区别：festival“节日”,指喜庆的日子或持续一段时间的文娱活动；holiday(假日、
休息日),指法定假日或风俗习惯,复数可以表示一个较长的假期；vacation“假期”,指学习或工作中一段长时间的休
息。如：The Shanghai Television Festival will be held next month.(上海电视节将在下个月举行) / Sunday is a holiday
and most people do not work.(星期天是个假日,多数人不工作) / What are you going to do during the summer
vacation/holidays?(在暑期你打算做什么事情？)
3、journey、tour、trip、travel 的区别：journey 指在陆地上(或海上或空中)进行的长途旅行,不知终点,含有辛苦的意
思；tour 指途中作短期逗留的巡回旅行,强调游览多处,常用来指观光等；trip 通常指往返定时的短途旅行,如出差
度假等；travel 多指长期或长途的观光旅行,尤其指到国外,没有明确目的地,也作不可数名词,指旅行这一行为。如：
He made up his mind to make the journey to Dunhuang.(他拿定主意要去敦煌旅行)/ He has gone on a walking
tour.(他步行观光去了) / He took several trips to Shanghai last yeaar.(去年他去了上海好几次) / Did you go to
Santiago(圣地亚哥) during your travels?(旅行期间你去圣地亚哥了吗？) / Travelling through thick forests is
dangerous.(在密林里边穿行是很危险的)
4、sound、noise、voice 的区别：sound 指各种声音；noise 主要指“噪音”；voice 指人的“嗓音”。如：The noise of
the street kept me awake in the night.(街上的喧嚣声让我彻夜难眠) / All of a sudden there was the sound of shots
and a cry.(突然间传来几声枪响和一声尖叫) / The singer has lost her ringing voice as a result of a bad cold.(因为感
冒的缘故,这个歌唱家失去了她银铃般的嗓音)
5、fish 的问题：指许多条鱼且不管种类时,用fish,单复数相同；fishes 指许多种类的鱼；fish 指“鱼肉”时是不可
数名词。如：There are many kinds of fishes in the pool. (池子里有很多种类的鱼)/ I prefer fish to meat.(与肉相比
我更喜欢鱼)
三、代词：
1、代词的分类：英语中代词分为：人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、指示代词、关系代词、疑问代词、连接代词和不
定代词等等。
2、人称代词：人称代词代替人和事物的名称,分为主格和宾格两种形式。
第一人
第二人
第
三
人
称
单
数
第
一
第
二
第三人称复
数
70
称
单
数
称单数
阳性
阴
性
中
性
人
称
复数
人
称
复数
主
格
I
(我)
you (你)
he
(他)
she
(她)
it
(它)
we
(我们)
you
(你们)
they (他们,
她们,它们)
宾
格
me
(我)
you (你)
him
(他)
her
(她)
it
(她)
us
(我们)
you
(你们)
them (他们,
她们,它们)
1、主格用来作句子的主语、表语。如： I often go shopping on Sundays.(星期天我常去购物) / Are they from Brazil?(他
们是巴西人吗？) / Where have they gone?(他们上哪儿去了？) / That’s it.(就那么回事) / It’s he!(是他！)
2、宾格用来作及物动词或者介词的宾语。如：Who teaches you English this year?(今年谁教你们的英语？) / Help
me!(救救我！) / We often write letters to her.(我们常给他写信)
3、人称代词作表语或者放在比较状语从句连词than 或as 之后时,可以用主格形式,也可以用宾格形式,口语中大多用
宾格。如：--Who is it?(是谁？) –It’s I/me.(是我。)
4、 三个不同人称同时出现,或者主语中包含“我”时,按照“you→he→I”的顺序表达。如：
Both he and I are working at that computer company.(我和他都在那家电脑公司上班) –Who will go there?(谁
要去那儿？) –You and me.(你和我)
5、 人称代词it 除了可以指人指物之外,还可以表示“时间、天气、温度、距离、情况”等含义,此外还可以作“非
人称代词”使用,替代作主语或者宾语的不定式、动名词或者名词性从句。如：--What’s the weather like today?(今
天天气怎样？)—It’s fine.(天气晴好) / --What’s the time?(几点啦？) –It’s 12：00.(12 点) / It’s a long way to go.(那
可要走好长的路) / It took him three days to clean his house.(打扫屋子花了他三天的时间) / It is very clear that
the public want to know when these men can go into space.(很显然,公众想知道这些人什么时候能进入太空) / We
found it very difficult to learn a foreign language well.(我们发觉要学好一门外语是非常困难的)
3、物主代词：说明事物所属关系的代词,分为形容词性和名词性两种。
第一人
称单
数
第二人
称单数
第
三
人
称
单
数
第一人
称复
数
第二人
称复数
第三人称复数
阳性
阴性
中性
形容
词
性
my
(我的)
your
(你的)
his
(他的)
her
(她的)
its
(它的)
our
(我们
的)
your
(你们
的)
their (他们的,她们
的,它们的)
名词
性
mine
(我的)
Yours
(你的)
his
(他的)
hers
(她的)
its
(她的)
ours
(我们
的)
yours
(你们
的)
theirs(他们的,她们
的,它们的)
1、形容词性物主代词只能作句子中名词的修饰语,后面要跟名词。如：
Is that your umbrella?(那是你的伞吗？) / I often go to see my aunt on Sundays.(我经常在星期天去看望阿姨) /
They are their books.(是他们的书)
2、名词性物主代词相当于名词,既代替事物又表明所属关系,在句子中往往独立地作主语、宾语或者表语,后面千万
不可以跟名词。如：
This is your cup,but where is mine?(这是你的杯子,可我的在哪儿？) / Your classroom is very big, but ours is
rather small.(你们的教室很大,我们的相当小)
3、“of + 名词性物主代词”称为双重所有格,作定语时放在名词的后面。如：
A friend of mine came to see me yesterday.(我的一个朋友昨天来看我了) (指若干朋友中有一个来看我。)
[试比较] My friend came to see me yesterday.(我的朋友昨天来看我了)(指我的那个特定的朋友来看我。)
4、反身代词：表示谓语的动作与主语有关或者宾语补足语的动作与宾语有关。
反身代词是一种表示反射或强调的代词。它的基本含义是：通过反身代词指代主语，使施动者把动作在形式上反射到
施动者自己。因此，反身代词与它所指代的名词或代词形成互指关系，在人称、性、数上保持一致。
第一人
称
单
数
第二人
称单数
第
三
人
称
单
数
第一人称
复数
第二人称
复数
第三人称复
数
阳
性
阴
性
中
性
myself
( 我自
己)
yourself
(你自己)
himself
(他自己)
herself
(她自己)
itself
(它自己)
ourselves
(我们自己)
yourselves
(你们自己)
themselves
(他们/她们
/它们自己)
1、反身代词在句子中作宾语表示反射(指一个动作回到该动作执行者本身)。如：
Don’t play with the knife, you might hurt yourself.(不要玩刀子,那会割伤你的)
71
2、在句子中作同位语表示强调(即用来强调名词或代词的语气)。如：
The story itself is good. Only he didn’t tell it well.(故事本身是好的,只是他没有讲好)
6、 指示代词： 指示说明近处或者远处、上文或者下文、以前或者现在的人或事物。
单数
复数
含义
this(这个)
these(这些)
指较近的人和物
that(那个)
those(那些)
指较远的人和物
such (这样的人/物)
指上文提过的人和物
same (同样的人/物)
指和上文提过的相同的人和物
it (这人/这物)
指不太清楚是谁或者是什么时
指示代词既可以单独使用做句子的主语、宾语或表语,也可以作定语修饰名词。如：
What’s this?(这是什么？) / That model plane is made of plastic.(那只模型飞机是塑料做的)(被动句) / Remember
never to do such things.(记得永远不要做这样的事情) / Do the same as the teacher tells you. (按老师说的做)/
---Who is it?(是谁？) ---It’s me!(是我！)
6、关系代词：用来引导定语从句的代词叫关系代词,参见后面的定语从句。
1、关系代词who 、which、 that 、whom 等,将定语从句和主句连接起来。英语中的关系代词一方面在从句中担
任一定的成分,另一方面又起连接作用。
如：The student who is drawing a picture is in Grade One.(正在画画的学生是一年级的)
2、关系代词who / whom 指人,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：
Do you know the man who is wearing a red hat? (你认识那个戴着红帽子的男人吗？)
3、关系代词which 指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：Have you found the book which you lost several days
ago?(你找到几天前丢失的那本书了吗？)
4、关系代词that 既可指人也可指物,如果作从句的宾语,则有时省略。如：Can you see the man/dog that is running
along the river bank ?(你看得见顺着河跑的男人/狗了吗？)
7、连接代词：用来引导宾语从句、主语从句或表语从句的连接词称连接代词。
英语中连接代词主要有：what(什么),who(谁),whom(谁),which(哪个),whose(谁的)。详见相应从句。
8、不定代词：代替或修饰不特指的人或事物的代词叫不定代词。
单数
含义
some
any
no
none
/
/
each
(every)
one
either,
neither
so
the other,
another
复合不
定代词
不可数
含义
much
little,
a little
all
/
/
/
/
/
复数
含义
many
few,
a few
ones
both
others,
the others
※ 注：复合不定代词有12 个：something(某事), someone(某人), somebody(某人), anything
(任何事), anyone(任何人), anybody(任何人), nothing(没事),nobody(没有人), no one(没有人), everything(一切),
everyone(每个人), everybody(每个人).
(1)some 和 any 的用法：
some 一般用于肯定句中,意思是“几个”、
“一些”、
“某个”作定语时可修饰可数名词或不可数名词。如：I have some
work to do today. (今天我有些事情要做)/ They will go there some day.(他们有朝一日会去那儿)
some 用于疑问句时,表示建议、请求或希望得到肯定回答。如：Would you like some coffee with sugar?(你要加糖
的咖啡吗？)
any 一般用于疑问句或否定句中,意思是“任何一些”、“任何一个”,作定语时可修饰可数或不可数名词。如：They
didn’t have any friends here. (他们在这里没有朋友)/ Have you got any questions to ask?(你有问题要问吗？)
any 用于肯定句时,意思是“任何的”。Come here with any friend.(随便带什么朋友来吧。)
(2)no 和none 的用法：
no 是形容词,只能作定语表示,意思是“没有”,修饰可数名词(单数或复数)或不可数名词。如：There is no time left.
Please hurry up.(没有时间了,请快点) / They had no reading books to lend.(他们没有阅读用书可以出借)
none 只能独立使用,在句子中可作主语、宾语和表语,意思是“没有一个人(或事物)”,表示复数或单数。如：None
of them is/are in the classroom.(他们当中没有一个在教室里) / I have many books, but none is interesting.(我有
很多的书,但没有一本是有趣的)
(3)all 和both 的用法：
all 指三者或三者以上的人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词；也可用来代替或修饰不可数名词。
72
both 指两个人或物,用来代替或修饰可数名词。all 和both 在句子中作主语、宾语、表语、定语等。如：I know all
of the four British students in their school.(他们学校里四个英国学生我全认识) / --Would you like this one or
that one? –Both.(你要这个还是那个？两个都要。)
all 和both 既可以修饰名词(all/both+(the)+名词),也可以独立使用,采用“all/both + of the +名词(复数)”的形式,其
中的of 可以省略。如：All (of) (the) boys are naughty.(是男孩都调皮)
(4)every 和each 用法：
every 是形容词,只能作定语修饰单数名词,意思是“每一个”,表示整体概念；
each 是形容词、代词,可用作主语、宾语、定语等,意思是“每个”或者“各个”,表示单个概念；each 可以放在
名词前,可以后跟of 短语,与动词同时出现时要放在“be 动词、助动词、情态动词”之后或者行为动词之前
every 和each 都用作单数理解,但是下文中既可以用单数的代词(如he/him/his)也可以用复数的代词(如
they/them/their)替代。如：Every one of the students in his class studies very hard.(他班上每个学生学习都很用
功) / They are very busy. Each of them has something to do.(他们很忙,人人都有事干)
(5)either 和neither 的用法：
either 意思是“两个中间的任何一个”；neither 是either 的否定形式,意思是“两个都不”。
neither 和either 在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语等,都用作单数。如：I don’t care much for what to drink. Either of
the two will do. (我不介意喝些什么,两个之中随便哪个都行) / --Will you go there by bus or by car? –Neither. I
will go there by train.(你坐公车去还是坐轿车去？一个都不坐,我坐火车去。)
(6)other、the other 和another 的用法：
other 意思是“另一”、“另一些”,有复数形式。在句子中可作主语、宾语和定语。another 意思是“另外”、“又
一个”,表示增加,在句中可作宾语和定语。如：
Some girls are singing under the big apple tree and others are sitting on the grass talking.(有些女孩在大苹果树
下唱歌,别的就躺在草地上说话) / You have had several cakes. Do you really want another one?(你已经吃
了好几块饼子了,你真的还要一块？) / I want another four books.(我还要四本书)
another(另外的,再一,又一)与the other(另外的一个) 主要从数量上区分,只有两个时用the other,在原先基础上增
加用another。如： This is one of your socks. Where is the other one?(这是你的一只袜子,还有一只呢？) / I
have eaten 4 cakes, but I still want another.(我已经吃了4 块蛋糕,但是我还要以块。)
others 与the others 的主要区别：others 指“剩余的人/物”(指大部分)；the others 指“其余的人/物”,(指全部)。
如：A few students are playing soccer while others are watching them.(有几个学生在踢足球,其他一些人在观看)
/ Two of the ten boys are standing and the others are sitting round them.(十个男孩中有两个站着,其他人都围着
他们坐着。)
(7)many 和much 的用法：
many 意思是“很多”,与可数名词复数连用；much 意思是“很多”,与不可数名词连用。它们在句中可作主语、
宾语和定语等。如：I don’t have many friends here.(在这里我没有很多的朋友。) /Many died in the bus
accident.(许多人在公交车祸中丧失) / We can learn much with the help of him.(在他的帮助之下我们能学到很
多)
many 和much 一般用于否定句,肯定句中通常用a lot of 或者lots of; many / much 用于肯定句时可以在前面加上
so、very 或too.如： There are a lot of people on the playground.(操场上有许多的人)/ They haven’t got much
work to do.(他们没有多少事情可做) / There are too many people in the room.(房间里人太多了。)
(8)few、little、a few、a little 的用法：
few、little 意思是“很少几个”、“几乎没有”,有否定的意思,a few、a little 意思是“有几个”、“有些”,有肯定
的意思 ；few、a few 与可数名词连用或代替可数的事物, little、a little 与不可数名词连用或代替不可数的事物。
它们在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。如：
He is very poor and he has little money.(他很穷,几乎没有什么钱。) / Don’t worry. There is still a little time left.(别
着急,还有一点儿时间呢。) / In that polar region there live few people.(在那个极地地区几乎不住人) / You can get
a few sweets from him.(你可以从他那儿弄到一些糖果)
(9)复合不定代词somebody ,something ,anything, nothing ,everything, everybody 等是由some , any ,no ,every, 加上body,
thing 构成的,叫做复合不定代词,在句子中当单数使用。
somebody, something, someone 一般用于肯定句中；anything, anybody,anyone 一般用于疑问句、否定句和条件状
语从句中。修饰复合不定代词的定语,应放在它们的后面。如：Hey,Lily. There is someone outside the door. (嗨,丽
丽,门外有人。) /Di(每个人)d you meet anyone when you came to school last Sunday?(上个星期天你来学校时见到
什么人了吗？)/He has nothing much to do today.(他今天没有多少事情做)
(10)one 与ones 用来代替上文的一个或多个人或事物,前面可以加冠词、形容词、指示代词、which 等。如： Which jacket
would you like, this one or that one?(你要哪件夹克,这件还是那件？ / I don’t like the green ones.(我不喜欢绿色的
73
那些)
(11)so 可以代替一件事情,作句子的宾语或表语。如： I don’t think so.(我认为不是这样的。) / He lost a book. So did
I.(他丢失了一本书,我也是。)
(12)a lot of、lots of、a number of( /large numbers of)、a great deal of、plenty of 的区别：五个“名词+介词”短语都表
示“大量,许多”,a lot of(或lots of)既可以修饰不可数名词也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式,可以相应地换为much
和many；plenty of“足够、大量”,既可以修饰不可数名词也可以修饰可数名词的复数形式。 a number of / large
numbers of 只可以修饰可数名词复数形式(它修饰的词作主语时谓语用复数形式)可以换为some、many、a lot of、
plenty of。 a great deal of 只可以修饰不可数名词(它修饰的词作主语时谓语用单数形式)可以换为much。
如：A lot of people think that time is money.(许多的人认为时间就是金钱。) / I don’t have to do it in a hurry because
I have plenty of time.(我用不着赶忙,因为我有充足的时间。) / I have a number of letters to write today.(今天我有好
多信要写) / I spend a great deal of time/money on shopping.(在购物方面我花费了大量的时间/金钱。)
(13)none、no one、nobody 的区别：no one 和nobody 都表示“没有人”,仅指人,后面不跟of 短语,作主语时谓语用单
数形式；none 表示“没有一个人/物”,可指人也可以指物,后面可跟of 短语,作主语时谓语可用单数也可用复数。
如：No one knows how he managed to get the ticket.(没有人知道他是怎样搞到那张票的) / Nobody handed in
his/their composition(s) yesterday.(昨天没有一个人交作文。) / None of my friends came to see me that day.(那天没
有一个朋友来看我。)
9、相互代词：表示相互关系的词叫相互代词。
each other ,one another 是相互代词,译成“互相”,可以通用。each other 表示两者之间,而one anther 表示许多人
之间。它们有所有格形式each other’s ,one another’s。如： We must help each other when we are in trouble.(我们
身处困境时要互相帮助。) / They sat there without talking to one another / each other.(他们坐在那儿,互相都不说
话。)
10、疑问代词：用来提出问题的代词称为疑问代词。
1、who、whom、whose、what、which、whoever、whatever、whichever 主要用于特殊疑问句中,一般放在句首。口
语中也常用who 代替whom 作宾语,但在介词后则只能用whom。如：
Who(m) did you invite to your birthday party?(你都邀请了谁参加你的生日聚会的？) / What does she want to be
when she grows up?(她长大了想干什么？)
2、who 和whom 只能独立使用,其中who 可以作句子的主语、表语或动词的宾语,whom 只能作谓语动词的宾语；
而what、which、whose 等既可以独立使用作主语、表语和宾语,也可以与名词构成疑问短语。如： Who is that
man?(那男的是谁？) / What colour are their hats?(他们的帽子是什么颜色？) / Which car was made in
Germany?(哪辆车是德国造的？)(被动句)
注意这个提问：The man in the car is my father.(车里的男人是我父亲)
→Which man is your father?(哪个男人是你的父亲？)
3、which 除了可以询问指代的情况之外,还可以针对说明人物的时间、地点、岁数、颜色、大小、状况等进行提问。
如：People there live a very sad life.(那里的人生活凄惨) →Which people live a sad life? (哪些人生活凄惨？)/
--Which hotel have you booked for your holiday?(为了度假你预订了哪家旅馆？)—The biggest one in
Haikou.(海口最大的那家旅馆)
4、疑问代词不分单复数,视它所替代的人或事物决定单复数,但是通常用单数；如果修饰名词,则以名词的单复数为
准。如：Who is (are) in that playhouse?(谁在游戏房里？) / What is that? (那是什么？)/ What are those? (那些是
什么？) / What colours do they have?(它们有哪些颜色？)
初一代词练习：
1.— Judy, is this _______ mobile phone or Helen’s?
— It’s ________.
A. your, mine B. your, my C. you, mine D. you, my
四、数词：
1、分类：数词有基数词和序数词两种。英语的数词可以作句子的主语、宾语、表语和定语。
2、基数词：表示数目的词叫基数词。
1、 英语中常用的基数词有：
74
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
ten
eleven
twelve
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
thirteen
fourteen
fifteen
sixteen
seventeen
eighteen
nineteen
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
twenty
thirty
forty
fifty
sixty
seventy
eighty
ninety
one(a) hundred
23
35
101
twenty-three
thirty-five
one hundred and one
1000→one(a) thousand,10000 → ten thousand,100000 →one
hundred thousand
,1000000 →one
million,10000000→ten million, 100000000→one hundred million,
108→one hundred and eight, 146→one hundred and forty-six, 500→five hundred , 1001→one thousand and one,
1813→one thousand eight hundred and thirteen.
2、[注]：(1)百位与十位之间要加and；十万位和万位,亿位和千万位之间通常也要加and。
(2)英语用千、百万等单位计数,大数字从右向左看, 每隔三位划一逗号,倒数第一个逗号之前要用thousand,倒
数第二个逗号之前要用million,倒数第三的逗号之前要用billion 表示。
(3) hundred、 thousand、 million 作数词时,不用复数,前面可以加上one, two, …等其它数词。用作名词时复
数表示“成…上…”,后面必须要有of,前面可以加上some,many,several 等词。如：five hundred(五百),
hundreds of(成百上千的), ten thousand(一万), thousands of(成千上万的), millions of(成百万的)
3、序数词：表示顺序的数词叫序数词。
1、 英语的序数词基本变法：
(1) 一般在基数词后加th,(2)-ve 结尾的改为-fth,(3)-ty 结尾的改为-tieth,(4)熟记特殊词。
2、序数词如下：
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
11th
12th
※first
※
second
※third
fourth
fifth
sixth
seventh
eighth
ninth
tenth
eleventh
twelfth
13th
14th
15th
16th
17th
18th
19th
thirteenth
fourteenth
fifteenth
sixteenth
seventeent
h
eighteenth
nineteenth
20th
30th
40th
50th
60th
70th
80th
90th
100th
twentieth
thirtieth
fortieth
fiftieth
sixtieth
seventieth
eightieth
ninetieth
one
undredth
21st
22nd
23rd
35th
101st
twenty-first
twenty-second
twenty-third
thirty-fifth
one
hundred
and
first
1000th→one thousandth, 1000000th →one millionth., 第703→the seven hundred and third,
第5480→the five thousand four hundred and eightieth.
3、注：(1)两位以上的序数词仅个位数部分用序数词,其余部分仍用基数词。如：thirty-sixth,
(2) 使用序数词时一般加定冠词the. 如：I’m in the third grade.
(3) 序数词作“几分之几”讲时,有复数形式。如：1/5→one fifth ; 2/3→ two thirds ; 4/7→ four sevenths ; 1/2
→ a half ; 1/4→a quarter ; 3/4→ three quarters ; 50%→ fifty hundredths ( fifty per cent).
4、数词的用法：
1、表示年份：2002: twenty thousand and two ; 1976 : nineteen seventy-six.
2、表示日期： 12 月1 日: Dec.1st 或the first of December；2002 年11 月8 日: Nov. 8th, 2002.
3、表示时刻： 5：15→ five fifteen 或a quarter past five ; 8：30→ eight thirty 或half past eight ; 10：45→ ten forty-five
或a quarter to eleven.
4、表示编号：Room 105→Room one 0 five; Bus No.13→Bus Number Thirteen; P.5→Page Five; Tel.No.7658659→
Telephone Number seven-six-five-eight-six-five-nine
5、小数的读法：5.7→ five point seven, 0.16 →zero point one six.
75
6、“半”的表达： 1/2→half, 半小时→half an hour, 1.5 小时→one and a half hours 或one hour and a half.
7、序数词前面加the 时,表示顺序,加a/an 时表示“再一、又一”。如：The third lesson is rather difficult.(第三课相当
难)/ Shall we read the text a third time?(我们把课文读第三遍,好吗？)
五、冠词
1、冠词分类及读法：
英语中冠词有不定冠词和定冠词两种,常放在名词的前面,用来限定名词的意义,起泛指或特指的作用。定冠词the 读
法：单独念时读[Ti:],在句子中常发[Ti ](元音之前)或者[T[](辅音之前)；
不定冠词a/an 的读法：单独念时读 [ei ]/[An ]；在句子中常发 [[]/[[n]。
2、不定冠词a / an 的用法：
不定冠词a / an 用在单数名词的前面,a 用在辅音开头的词前面; an 用在元音开头的词的前面。
不定冠词的基本用法：
(1) 表示某一个人或东西,但不具体说明何人或何物。如：There is a dog lying on the ground.(有一只狗躺在地上。)
(2) 表示某类人或事物,以区别于其他种类。如：A elephant is much stronger than a man.(大象比人强壮多了。)(不能
译为：一头大象比一个人强壮。)
(2) 表示某类人或事物中的任何一个。如：He is a teacher of English.(他是英语教师。)
(4) 表示“一”这个数量。如：There is a table and four chairs in that dining-room.(在那个餐厅里有一张桌子和四把
椅子。)
(5) 几个用不定冠词的习语：a bit(一点), a little(一点), a few(几个), a lot (许多), a kind of(一种), a pair of(一副、一
双), a number of(大量的), a piece of (一张、一片), half an hour(半小时), have a good time(玩得开心), have a
cold(感冒), make a noise(发出嘈杂声), have/take a (rest 等)(休息)一会儿,等等。
3、定冠词the 的用法：定冠词the 用在可数名词的单数或复数或不可数的名词前面。
定冠词的基本用法：
(1) 表示特指的人或事物。如：The man with a flower in his hand is Jack..(手上拿着一朵花的男人是杰克)
(2) 指谈话双方都熟悉的人或事物。如：Look at the blackboard,Lily.(莉莉,请看黑板。)
(3) 复述前面提到过的人或事物。如：There is a man under the tree. The man is called Robert. (树下有个人, 那个人
叫罗伯特。)
(4) 表示世界上独一无二的事物。如：The earth turns around the sun.(地球绕太阳旋转。)
(5) 用在表示方位的名词前面。如：There will be strong wind to the south of the Yangtze River.(长江以南地 区将会
刮大风。)
(6) 在序数词和形容词最高级的前面。如：Who is the first one to go?(谁第一个去？) / Of all the stars, the sun is the
nearest to the earth.(在所有的恒星之中太阳离地球最近)
(7) 常用在乐器名称的前面。如：He began to play the violin at the age of 5.(五岁时他开始拉小提琴)
(8) 用在江河、海洋、山脉等名称的前面。如：I have never been to the Himalaya Mountains.(我从来没有去过喜马拉
雅山)
(9) 用在含有普通名词的专有名词的前面。如：He is from the United States of America.(他来自美利坚合众国)
(10)用在姓氏之前表示一家人。如：The Greens are going to Mount Emei next month.(下个月格林一家要去峨眉山)
(11)same 之前一般用the。如：Lucy and Lily look the same.(露西和莉莉看上去长得一样)
(12)几个用定冠词的习语：at the same time (与此同时),make the bed(铺床),in the end(最后),all the time(一直),by the
way(顺便说一下),on the way(在路上)等等。
4、一些不用冠词的情况：
(1) 专有名词和(第一次使用)一些不可数名词时前面通常不用。如：China is a very large country.(中国是个大国) /
Man needs air and water.(人类需要空气和水)
(2) 名词前已有指示、物主或不定代词作定语时不用。如：My pen is much more expensive than yours.(我的钢笔比
你的昂贵多了)
(3) 周名,月名或季节名前一般不用。如：He was born on Monday, February 18,1995.(他出生在1995 年二月十八日,
星期一) / They usually plant trees on the hills in spring.(春天他们通常在山上植树)
(4) (第一次使用)复数名词表示人或事物的类别时不用。如：Men are cleverer than monkeys.(人比猴子聪明)
(5) 三餐饭前不用。如：We have breakfast at home and lunch at school.(我们在家吃早饭,在校吃午饭)
(6) 节、假日前一般不用。如：On Children’s Day the boys often get presents from their parents.(在儿童节,这些男孩
经常得到父母的礼物)
76
(7) 球类名词前不用。如：The children play football on Saturday afternoons.(孩子们星期六下午踢足球)
(8) 城市的重要/主要建筑物名称前不用。如：They are now at People’s Cinema.(他们此刻在人民电影院)
(9) 一些习惯用语中不用。如：⑴ at / to / from / out of / after / for school; ⑵ in / to / for / after class; ⑶in / to / out
of / into bed; ⑷ after / at/ from / out of / to work; ⑸ at / to sea; ⑹ in / from / down / to town; ⑺ at / from
home; ⑻ at / for / to breakfast/lunch/supper; ⑼ at night/noon/midnight; ⑽ on foot; ⑾ go to school/bed; ⑿
on top of; ⒀ in front of; ⒁ on show/display/duty/watch; ⒂ in / out of hospital; ⒃ at all; ⒄ on/in time; ⒅
at first/last/once; ⒆ in Chinese/English,etc.; ⒇ take care of
六、形容词、副词：
1、形容词：用来说明或修饰名词、代词的词称为形容词。
1、形容词的句法作用：作句子中名词的定语、句子的表语以及宾语补足语。
2、形容词在句子中的位置：
⑴作定语时放在名词的前面,且音节少的词放在音节多的词之前。如：a big yellow wooden wheel(一个黄色的大
木轮)
⑵作表语时放在连系动词之后。如：The price sounds reasonable.(这个价格听起来算是合理)
⑶作宾语补足语时放在宾语之后。如：We must try our best to keep our environment clean .(我们必须尽力保持我
们的环境清洁)
⑷后置的情况：
①修饰复合不定代词时放在代词之后。如：Something serious has happened to him.(他发生了严重的事故)
②与表示“长、宽、高、重、老、远离”的词连用时形容词后置。如：He’s 1.8 metres tall.(他身高1.8 米。)The
moon is about 380,000 kilometres away from the earth.(月球离地38 万公里)
3、有关形容词的用法辨析：
⑴ whole 与all：记住两个词序：① the whole + 名词； ②all (of) the + 名词。如：He was busy the whole morning.(整
个早晨他都很忙) / He can remember all the words he learns.(他能记住学过的所有单词)
⑵ tall 与high, short 与low：指人的个子时用tall 与short；指其他事物时一般用high 与low。如：He’s very
tall/short.(他个子高/矮) / Tall trees are standing on both sides of that avenue.(大道的两侧有高大的树木) / A few
people live on high mountains.(少量的人住在高山上)
⑶ real 与true：real 一般指东西的真假,译为“真的”；而true 则指事情或消息的可靠性,译为“真实的”。如：This
is a real diamond(钻石) and it’s very expensive.(这是货真价实的钻石,非常贵) / --Is that true?—Yes. I heard it with
my own ears.(那真实吗？ 是的,我亲耳所听)
⑷ interested 与interesting 的区别：interesting 指人或东西“有趣的”,作定语或表语,而interested 则表示人对别的
事物“感兴趣的”,只能作表语。如：The man is very interesting and all the children like him. (这个人很有趣,孩子
们都喜欢他)/ This book is interesting and you can really enjoy yourself.(这本书很有趣,你会真正获得享受) / I am
interested in science.(我对自然科学感兴趣)
⑸ such 用法： such + a(n) + 名词(单数)(+that 从句)。如：I have never seen such a foolish(愚蠢的) boy.(我从来没
有见过这么蠢的男孩) / He had such a terrible accident that he could never forget it.(他遭遇了这么可怕的事故,他
永远也不会忘记)
⑹ good 与well：表示“好”时,作定语或表语用good,作状语用well；表示“(身体)好”时用well.如：Doing sports
is good for us.(进行运动对我们有益) / Study well and make progress every day.(好好学习,天天向上) / --How are
you?—I am very well.(你好吗？我很好。)
⑺ nice 与fine：的区别：nice 表示令人愉快的,可以指东西、人物外表等；fine 一般指身体或天气好。如：Let’s go
and share(分享) the nice cake.(我们去分享那块美味的蛋糕吧) / She is a nice girl.(他是个漂亮的姑娘) / What a
fine day!(多好的天气！) /He’s fine recently(最近).(近来他身体不错)
⑻ too much 与much too：too much 表示“太多的”,修饰事物数量；much too 表示“太过,过分”,修饰形容词或
副词。如：I am full because I have had too much rice.(我饱了,因为我吃了太多的米饭) / That coat is much too
dear.(那件大衣太贵了)
⑼ quick、fast 与soon：quick 与fast 基本同义,quick 往往指反应速度快,fast 往往指运动速度快,而soon 则表示时
间上很快即将发生。如：After a quick breakfast, he hurried to school leaving his bag at home.(匆匆地吃过早饭,他
朝学校赶去,却把书包忘记在家) / A train is much faster than a bus.(火车比公共汽车快得多) / His father will be
back to China very soon.(他父亲很快就要返回中国)
⑽lonely 与alone：lonely 是表示心理活动的形容词,意思是：“孤独的,寂寞的”,作定语或表语；alone 的意思是：“独
自的,单独的”,指无人陪伴,仅作表语,(作为副词的alone 可作状语)。如：He lives alone but he doesn’t feel lonely.(他
77
一人独住,但是并不感到孤独)/ He is a lonely person. You can not easily get on well with him.(他是个孤独的人,你要
和他相处好实在不易)
⑾ other 与else 的区别：两个词都可以作形容词,但是用法不同,other 放在名词前；else 修饰不定代词、疑问词、little、
much,后置,另外,or else 表示“否则”,是连词。如：The other students are on the playground.(其他学生在操场上) /
Who else can work out this maths problem?(还有谁能解出着道数学题？) / This is nobody else’s money. It’s
mine.(这不是别的什么人的钱,是我的。) / Do you have anything else to say for yourself?(你还有什么要为自己说的
吗？
⑿ special 与especial 的区别：表示事件不同寻常、过分或特殊时,两个词可互换,但special 较为常用。另外,special
还可以表示特别的目的。如： She pays (e)special attention to clothes.(她非常注重着装) / These are special chairs for
small children.(这些是专门给小孩子的椅子)
⒀ gone、lost、missing 的区别：gone 表示“丢了,没了”,含一去不复返的意思,也可以表示“死了”,作表语或宾补,
不可以作定语；lost 表示“丢失”,含难以找回的意思,可作定语、表语或宾补；missing 表示“失踪了,不见了”,
强调某人物不在原处,可作定语、表语或宾补。如：My fever(高烧) is gone, but I still have a cough.(发烧消退了,但
我仍然咳嗽) / The parents found the lost child at last.(家长终于找到了迷路的孩子) / My dictionary is
missing.Who’s taken it away?(我的字典不见了,谁拿走了？) / For more detailed information(详情) of the missing
girls, please visit our website(网址).(如果想知道失踪女孩们的详情,请访问我们的网站)
⒁ living、alive、live、lively 的区别：四个词都来源于动词live“生活、居住”。
living 读[‘liviN]有三个意思：①“活着的、现存的”,作表语或定语,②“一模一样的、逼真的”,③相当于lively,
意思是“强烈的、活泼的”；
live 读[laiv],指东西“活的”,可以替换为living；
alive 读[[‘laiv]作表语,指人“活着的”,如果作定语,则放在名词的后面；
lively 读[‘laivli]有三个意思：①有生气的、活泼的、快活的,②(色彩)鲜艳的,③生动的、真实的。
例如：A living language should be learned orally(口头上).(活的语言应该从口头上学)(被动句) / We have a living
hope that you will succeed.(我们强烈地希望你能成功) / Is she still alive?(她还活着吗？) / They are the
happiest children alive.(他们是活着的最开心的孩子) / This is a live fish.(这是条活鱼) / A live wire(电线) is
dangerous.(有电的电线是危险的) / She is as lively as a kitten(小猫).(她像小猫一样可爱) / He gave a lively
description of the football match.(他生动地描述了那场足球赛)
⒂ sick 与ill 区别：sick 和ill 都表示“生病的”,但是,sick 可以做定语、表语,而ill 只能做表语。如：He has been ill/sick
for a long time and he is very weak now.(他病了很久,现在非常虚弱) / Vets help treat sick pets and most of the pets’
owners like them.(兽医帮助诊治患病的宠物,很受宠物主人们的喜爱)
⒃ the poor(穷人们) / the rich(富人们)等用法：
“the+形容词”这一结构可以表示一类人物,复数含义。如：We must try
our best to help the poor.(我们应该尽力帮助穷人们) / The rich never know how the poor are living.(有钱人哪知穷
人怎么过日子)
2、副词：用来说明事情发生的时间、地点、原因、方式等含义或说明其它形容词或副词程度的词叫做副词。
1、副词的分类：(见下表)
时 间 副 词
频度副
词
地点/方位副
词
程度副词 方式副
词
疑问/连接副
词
其他副词
today, tomorrow, once,
here, there,
very, too,
well,
how,
too, also,
yesterday, now, twice,
home, below, enough,
hard,
where,
nor, so,
then, early, late, always,
anywhere,
rather,
quite,
alone,
when,
as, on,off,
once, soon, just, usually, above, outside, how, so,
fast,
why,
either,
tonight, long,
often,
in, inside, out, much, just, together, whether
yes, no,
already,
yet,
before,
sometime
s,
back,
up,
down,
nearly, only suddenly, however, etc.
not, neither
ago, later, ever
since
never,
away, off, far, almost,
hardly,
-ly 结尾
关系副词
maybe,
after, whenever
(seldom), near, nearby, as long as
等,
的副词 where,
perhaps,
first, someday,
ever,
wherever
even, all,
why, how
certainly,
sometime, last,
everywhere,
a little, a bit
when,
78
2、副词在句子中的位置以及作用：
⑴作状语：
① 时间副词：一般放在句首或句尾,注意,early、late、before、later、yet 等一般放在句尾,already、just 一般放
在动词的前面。如：We will visit the Great Wall tomorrow.(我们明天要去参观长城) / They have already been
to the UK twice.(他们去过英王国两次) / Soon the lost boy found his way back home.(不久迷路的孩子找到了
回家的路)
② 频度副词：一般放在be 动词之后或者助动词与主要动词之间,但sometimes、often 等还可以放在句首或句
尾,usually 可放在句首,once 可放在句尾,twice、three times 等一般放在句尾。如：Sometimes I get up early.(我
有时起得早)/ The workers usually have lunch at the factory.(工人们通常在厂里吃午饭) / Take this medicine
twice a day.(这种药一天吃两次)
③ 方式副词：一般放在行为动之后,suddenly 可以放在句首、句尾或动词之前。如：Old people can hardly walk
as quickly as young people.(老年人几乎不可能走得和年轻人一样快) / Suddenly he saw a light in the dark
cave(山洞).(突然,在黑黢黢的山洞里,他看见了一丝亮光)
④ 地点副词：一般放在句尾,但here、there 还可放在句首。如：There you can see thousands of bikes running
in all directions(方向).(在那里,你可以看到成千上万的自行车朝各个方向流动) / The frightened wolf ran
away.(受到惊吓的狼逃开了)/ He walked out quietly and turned back soon.(他悄悄地走了出去,很快又返回)
⑤ 程度副词：修饰动词时,放在动词之前；修饰形容词或副词时,放在形容词或副词之前。但注意,enough 总
是放在被修饰的形容词或动词的后面；only 位置比较灵活,总是放在被修饰的词的前面。如：I nearly forgot
all about it if he did not tell me again.(如果他不再次告诉我,我几乎把那事全忘了) / It was so strange that I
could hardly believe my ears.(它那么奇怪一直我都不能相信我的耳朵) / She got to the station early enough
to catch the first bus.(她早早地赶到车站赶上了首班车)
⑥ 疑问副词：用于对句子的状语进行提问,位置总是在句首。如：When and where were you born? (你何时何
地出生？)/ Why did little Edison sit on some eggs?(小爱迪生为什么要坐在鸡蛋上？)/ How do you do?(你
好！)
⑦ 连接副词：用来引导主语从句、宾语从句和表语从句,在从句中作状语。How I am going to kill the cat is still
a question.(我打算怎样杀死那只猫还是个问题)/ That is why everyone is afraid of the tiger.(那就是人人都害
怕老虎的原因) / He wondered how he could do it the next day.(他不知道第二天怎样做那事)
⑧ 关系副词：用来引导定语从句,在从句中作状语。如：This is the place where Mr Zhang once lived.(这就是
张先生曾经住过的地方)/ Please tell me the way how you have learned English so well.(请告诉我你的英语是
怎样学得这么好的方法)
⑨ 其它副词：too“也”,用在句尾；also 放在动词前；either “也不”,放在句尾；nor“也不”,放在句首；so
“如此,这样”,放在形容词、副词前；on/off“开/关”放在动词之后；not 放在be 之后、助动词之后、不
定式或动名词之前；maybe/perhaps 放在句首；certainly 放在句首或动词之前。如：He went to the Palace
Museum and I went there,too.(他去了故宫博物院,我也去了) / Maybe your ticket is in your inside pocket.(也
许你的票就在你的里边衣袋里) / --Tom doesn’t have a computer. –Nor do I.(汤姆没有计算机,我也没有。)
(2)作表语：地点副词一般可以作表语,放在be 等连系动词之后,说明人物所处的位置。如：I’m very sorry he isn’t in
at the moment.(很抱歉,他此刻不在家)/ I have been away from my hometown for nearly 20 years.(我离开家
乡有将近20 年了) / Jim is over there.(吉姆就在那边)
(3)作定语：时间副词(如now、then)以及许多地点副词都可以作名词的定语,放在名词的后面。如：People now often
have their festival dinners at restaurants.(现在的人们经常在餐馆里吃节日晚宴) / Women there were living a
terrible life in the 1920s.(在二十世纪20 年代那儿的女人过着可怕的日子)
(4)作宾语补足语：地点副词一般可以作宾语补足语。如：Put your dirty socks away, Jim! They are giving out bad
smell!(吉姆,把你的脏袜子拿开！它们在散发着臭气。) / Father kept him in and doing his lessons.(父亲把他
关在家里做作业)
[注意] “动词+副词”的宾语如果是代词,则该副词应该放在代词之后。如：He wrote down the word.(他写下了那
个词。)→He wrote it down.(他把它写了下来。)
3、有关副词的重要注释：
⑴ as…as…常构成一些词组：as soon as…(一旦…就…), as well as…(同样), as+形容词/副词+as possible(尽可
能……地)。如：Please ring me up as soon as you get to Beijing.(请你一到北京就给我写信。)/ Miss Gao hurried
to the school gate as quickly as possible.(高小姐尽快地赶到了校门口。)
[注释] “as long / much as + 名词”可以表示“长达/多达…”的含义。如：The house costs as much as five hundred
thousand yuan.(那幢房子花费高达50 万元。)/ They stayed in the cave(山洞)as long as two weeks.(他们呆在山洞
里长达两周。)
79
⑵ later、after、ago、before 的用法：①“一段时间+later/ago”分别表示“(多久)以后/以前”,主要用于过去时
态。②“after/before+某个时刻”分别表示“在某时刻之后/之前”,此时两个词是介词。③ago 与before：ago
只能用于过去时,before 用于完成时。如：He had an accident a week ago.(一周前出了一个事故)/ Some years later,
the boy became a very famous singer.(数年后这个男孩成了著名的歌唱家)/ Have you been there before?(你从前
到过那儿吗？)/ After a few years he gave up smoking.(过了几年他戒了烟。)
⑶ above、below、over、under 的用法：在上下方用above 和below,在高低处用over 和under.如：The stars are high
above in the sky.(星星高挂在空中) / A plane flew over quickly.(一架飞机从头顶飞过。)
当above、below、over、under 是介词性质时,意义相似。
⑷ too、also、either、nor 的用法：too(“也”)用于肯定句和疑问句的末尾,且用逗号隔开；also(“也”)用于肯
定句句子谓语动词之前；either(“也”)用于否定句末尾,也用逗号隔开；nor(“也不”)用于倒装句句首；如：
Are you American,too?(你也是美国人吗？)/ He is not happy and I am not happy, either.(他不愉快,我也不。) / He
didn’t watch the football game. Nor did I.(他没有看足球赛,我也没有。)/ You can also find the market is very
good.(你还可以发觉那个市场很好。)
⑸ enough、too、so、very、quite、very much 的用法： enough (“足够,十分”)放在形容词或副词之后；too(“太”)、
very(“非常”)、quite(“相当”)、so(“如此地”)等放在形容词或副词之前,very much(“非常”)放在动词之
后。如：It’s too/so/very/quite expensive.(它太贵/那么贵/非常贵/相当贵。)/ I don’t like sweets very much.(我不很
喜欢糖果)
[注意] very 与 much 的区别：very 修饰形容词、副词的原级和现在分词形容词,much 修饰形容词和副词的比较
级；much 还可以修饰疑问句和否定句中的动词,very 不可以。如：He is very stupid.(他很笨)/ The film was very
moving and everyone swept.(电影非常动人,大家都哭了)/ You must work much harder or you will fail to enter the
good school.(你得学习更努力,不然你考不进那所好学校)/ I don’t like him much.(我不太喜欢他)
⑹ sometimes、 sometime、 some times 、some time 的用法：sometimes(有时)用于一般现在时、 sometime(在将
来某时)用于将来时、 some times(数次)表示次数、some time(一些时间)表示一段时间。如：Sometimes they go
hiking in the mountains.(他们有时徒步旅行到山里去)/ I will stay here some time.(我会在这儿呆些时候的。)/ I
will meet your father sometime.(我什么时候要见见你的父亲。)
⑺ how、what 用于感叹句的用法：对句子中的形容词或副词感叹时用how,对人或事物(可能含有形容词作修饰
语)进行感叹用what. 如：What a fine day (it is) today!(今天天气真好！) / How difficult (the problem is)!((问题)
真难呀！)
⑻ already、yet 的用法：在完成时中,already 一般用于肯定句,yet 一般用于否定句和疑问句。如：Have you done
it already?(你已经做好了？) / I have not had my breakfast yet.(我还没有吃早饭呢。)
⑼ hard 与hardly 的用法：hard 作为副词意思是：“努力地,猛烈地”,hardly 是否定词,意思是：“几乎不”,一般
与情态动词can/could 连用。如：They study English very hard.(他们英语学得很刻苦)/ You can hardly see a
person spit in a public place.(在公共场所你几乎看不到一个人随地吐痰)
⑽ like...very much、like...better(=prefer)、like...best 的用法：三个短语分别表示“非常喜欢”、“更喜欢”、“最喜
欢”。如：I like baseball very much.(我非常喜欢棒球)/ Do you like butter better than cheese?( / They like
hamburgers best.
⑾“quite/what+a+形容词+名词”的用法：记住：①quite/such/what...+a+形容词+名词;②too/so/how+形容词+a+名
词;③rather+a+形容词+名词 = a+ rather+形容词+名词。如：I have never seen such a strange guy(家伙).(我从未
见过这样奇怪的家伙) / It is quite a nice day for a walk.(这真是散步的好日子)
⑿ how 的几个短语：how often“多常,每隔多久”,用于一般时态,对表示频度的词语进行提问； how soon“多
久以后”,用于将来时态； how long“多久”,用于过去时、完成时或其他时态； how many times“多少次”,
用于过去时或完成时,对总计次数进行提问； how much“多么,多少”,对程度进行提问,也可以对数量(不可数)
或金钱进行提问。如：How long have you been like this?(你这样已经多久了？)/ How often does he wash his
face?(他每隔多久洗一次脸？)
⒀ much、more 与most 的用法：这三个词除了是形容词作名词的修饰语之外,还是程度副词,much 表示“很”,
修饰原级形/副,more 表示“更”用来构成多音节形/副的比较级,most 表示“最”用来构成多音节形/副的最高级。
此外,much 也可以修饰比较级形/副。如：This park is much more beautiful than that one.(这个公园比那个漂亮
多了)/ It is the most instructive film I have ever seen.(这是我看过的最有教育意义的电影)
⒁ no more、no longer、not...any more、no...any longer 的用法：表示时间,可以用no longer、not...ny more、no...any
longer,而且no longer 只能放在谓语动词之前；表示程度,可以用no more、not...any more.如：He no longer lived
there.(他不再住在那里) / Tom wanted no more cakes.(他不想再要蛋糕) / He didn’ t smoke any more/longer.(他不
再抽烟)
⒂ 被动语态中,方式副词一般放在be 与谓语动词之间。如： The runner was badly hurt.(赛跑运动员受了重伤) /
80
English is widely spoken in the world today.(如今世界上英语说得很广泛)
⒃ too...to...与so...that...的问题：副词too/so 后面跟形容词或副词,to 后面跟动词,that 后面跟从句。Too...to...
(“太.……以致不……”)是否定的结构,用于简单句；so...that...(“如此…以致…”)是肯定结构,用于复合句。
如：The child is too young to join the army.(这孩子年龄太小还不能参军)/ He is so strong that he can lift the
heavy box.(他这么强壮,搬得动那个重箱子。)
⒄ 既是形容词也是副词的单词有：early, late, long, last, next, first, near, enough, much, all, hard, alone, fast, slow,
high, low, straight 等等。如：It was a long holiday.(那是个长假)/ He stayed there very long.(他在那儿呆了好久)/
Think hard then you will find a way.(好好想你就会找到办法)/ He is a very hard(难对付的) person.(他是个难玩
的家伙)
⒅ farther 与further 的用法区别：表示地点、方向或距离时两个词同义,意思为“更远、较远”,但是further 还
表示“更多、进一步、额外”等意思,此时不能换为farther. 如：They decided to go farther/further the next day.(他
们决定第二天走得再远些)/ This problem will be further discussed.(这个问题还要进一步讨论)/ Every one of
them had their further studies after they left college.(他们每个人大学毕业后继续进修)
⒆ rather 与quite 的用法区别：同very 一样,两个词都表示形容词或副词的程度,quite 表示“不到最高程度但是比
预料的好”,rather 比quite 更接近very 的含义,含有令人惊讶的意思。见下图对“nice”程度的描绘：
not nice (fairly) nice quite nice rather nice very nice
如：It’s quite a nice film.(这是部好片子)。(可能意味着不是一部最好的电影) / It’s rather a nice film.(这是部很
不错的电影。)(意味着比大多数电影都好)
[注意]注意quite 与rather 后面的次序词序。
⒇ maybe、possibly、perhaps 的区别：maybe“可能、也许”,比另外两个词更不正式、更随便、可能性不大；possibly
“可能地、或者、也许”,可能性较大,在否定句和疑问句中表示“无论如何”；perhaps“可能”,较为常用而且
正式,可能性也不大。如：You could put it over there,maybe.(也许你可以把它放在那边) / I couldn’t possibly have
finished such a long book in such a short time.(我不可能在这么短的时间内完成这么长的一本书)/ I thought
perhaps it was the letter you have been expecting.(我以为那也许就是你期盼的信件)
(21) most、mostly 的区别：most 作为形容词和名词时意思是“大多数的、大部分的”,作为副词时意思为“最,十分、
很”；mostly 仅为副词,意思为“主要地、多半地、大部分地”。如：I was at home most of the time when I was free.(我
有空时大部分时间都在家)Most children are naughty.(大部分的孩子都淘气)/ This is the most exciting part of
the film.(这是电影中最令人兴奋的部分)/She is mostly out on Sundays.(星期天她一般不在家)
(22) (be) worth、(be) worthy of 的区别：worth 一般被看作是介词,后面接名词或者动名词,用主动表示被动含义,还
可以用副词well 修饰；worthy of 表示“值得的、配得上的”,后面跟动名词的被动形式。如：What is worth doing
at all is worth doing well(凡是值得做的,就值得好好去做). / The house is worth ￥300,000.(房子价值30 万元)/
This book is well worth reading several times.(这本书值得好好读几遍)/ It is a thing worthy of being seen.(这是一
个值得看的东西)
(23)almost、nearly 的区别：两个词意思相近,都表示“几乎、将近”,大多数情况下可以互换,与否定词连用时用almost
不用nearly. almost no 相当于hardly any(几乎没有)。如：He had done almost nothing today.(他今天几乎没有干
什么) / We are almost/nearly there.(我们几乎就到那里了)/ Almost nobody/Hardly anybody understood his
words.(几乎没有人懂他的话)
(24) a bit 与a little 的区别：这两个名词短语经常当作副词使用,修饰形容词或副词的原级或比较级,可以互换,语气
比rather 弱。如：This digital camera is a bit(a little) expensive.(这台数码相机有点贵)/ It is a little(a bit) colder
than yesterday.(今天比昨天冷了点)
另外,a little 可以直接加不可数名词,a bit 则采用“a bit + of +名词(不可数或可数名词复数)”的形式。如：I have
got a bit of a cold.(我有点感冒)/ Go and get a little water for me, please.(请你去给我搞点水来)
[注意] not a bit(=not at all)意为“根本不”,而 not a little 则意为“非常,不是一点”。
3、形容词、 副词的原级、比较级和最高级
1、分类：形容词和副词有原级、比较级和最高级三级。
原级变为比较级和最高级有规则变化和不规则变化两种。
2、规则变化:
(1)单音节和部分双音节形容词和副词,在原级的后面加上er,est 构成比较级和最高级。
a)直接加er,est ：
b)以重读闭音节结尾的,要双写最后一个辅音字母,后加er,est：
c)以辅音字母+y 结尾的,先把y 改为i 再加上er,est：
(2)两个音节或两个以上的音节的,在原级前加more / most.
81
3、不规则变化:
原级
比较级
最高级
good 好的
better 更好的
best 最好的
well 好；(身体)好的,
bad,badly 糟糕的,糟糕地
worse 更糟糕的,更糟糕地；
(身体)更不舒服的
worst 最糟糕的,最糟糕地；
(身体)最不舒服的
ill(身体)不舒服的
many 许多的(可数)
more 更多的；更
most 最多的；最
much 许多的(不可数)；非常
little 少的
less 更少的
least 最少的
far 远的；远地
farther 更远的；更远地
farthest 最远的；最远地
further 进一步的(地)
furthest 最深刻的(地)
4、形容词和副词的原级、比较级和最高级的用法：
(1)讲述某人/物自身的情况时,用原级。基本句型是：
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 + (very/too/so/quite/rather…) + 形容词/副词原级 +….
如：He is very old now.(他现在很老了) / They ran quite fast.(它们跑得相当快) / The weather looks rather
bad.(天气看上去相当糟) / I am so happy!(我是如此的快乐)
☆表示两者之间没有差别时,使用句型：
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词 + as + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第二个人物 +….
如：He is as excited as his younger sister.(他和他妹妹一样兴奋)/ Lily rode her bike as slowly as an old lady.(莉
莉骑车像老太太一样慢)/ They picked as many apples as the farmers (did).(他们摘的苹果和农民一样多)
☆表示第一个人比不上第二个人时,使用句型：
主语(第一个人物) + 谓语动词(否定式) + as / so + 形容词/副词原级 + as + 第二个人物+….
如：He is not so / as excited as his younger sister.(他没他妹妹那么兴奋) / Lily did not ride her bike so / as slowly
as an old lady. (莉莉骑车不像老太太那样慢) / They didn’t pick so / as many apples as the farmers (did).
(他们摘的苹果不如农民多)
(2) 讲述两者有差异,第一个人物超过第二个人物时,用比较级。基本句型：
主语(‘A’)+谓语动词+(much/a little/even/still)+形容词/副词比较级+than+第二个人物(‘B’)+….
如：A modern train is much faster than a car.(现代的火车比轿车快多了) / This book didn’t cost me more than
that one.(这本书花费我的钱不比那本多)
讲述两者有差异,第一个人物不及第二个人物时,用比较级。句型是：
主语(‘A’) + 谓语动词 + less+ (多音节形/副)比较级 + than + 第二个人物(‘B’) +….
如：I think English is less difficult than maths.(我认为英语不比数学难)/ Do you think it less important to learn
a foreign language?(你认为学外语不那么重要吗？)
(3)讲述某人/物是一群之中最突出的一个时,用最高级。句型是：
主语(sb./sth) + 谓语动词 +(the) +形容词/副词最高级 +in / of ….
如：The Changjiang River is the longest in China.(长江是中国最长的河流) / He jumped (the) highest of the
three (boys).(三个男生中他跳得最高)
4、关于比较等级的重要注释：
1、以上六个句型中,如果动词是及物或不及物动词,则后面用副词；如果后面是连系动词,则后面用形容词。如：This car
is the fastest of the four.(形容词)(这辆汽车是四辆之中最快的)/ This car runs (the) fastest of the four.(副词)(这辆汽车
是四辆之中跑得最快的)
2、“比较级+and+比较级”表示“越来越……”。如：The weather is getting warmer and warmer.(天越来越温暖了)
3、“the+比较级…,the+比较级…”表示“越…就越…”。如：The more trees we plant,the better it will be.(我们栽的树越
多,情况就会越好)/ The harder you try,the greater your progress is.(你越是努力,进步就越大)
4、一般的形容词或副词的比较级前面可以加much/a little/even/still,而表示数量的more 之前还可以加some/ any/ no/
one/ two/ many/ several/ a lot 等词。如：It is much colder today than yesterday.(今天比昨天冷多了)/ Would you like
some more coffee?(你还要些咖啡吗？)/He did not eat any more.(他没有再吃)
5、more than / less than 分别可以理解为“多于/少于”,相当于副词,more than=over; less than=under.如：I lived in New
York for more than four months.(我在纽约生活了四个多月)
6、“one of the +最高级+名词(复数)”整个短语为单数含义,谓语要用单数形式。如：One of the oldest houses has been
82
burnt in a fire.(最古老的一幢房子在一场大火中被烧毁了)
7、“Which / Who+动词+形/副,□,□or□?”句型中,如果有两个选项,形/副用比较级,如果有三个选项,形/副用最高级。
如：Who has more books, Lin Tao or Han Mei? (林涛和韩梅谁的书最多？)/ Which is the heaviest,a pig,a horse or an
elephant?(猪、马、象哪个最重？)
8、上下文中含有both/either/neither/two/twins 等表示两个事物的词时,用比较级,而且往往还要加the；含有all/none/no
one/ every 等表示三个或三个以上事物时,用最高级。如： --Do you like the smaller one?—Neither.(小一点的那个你
喜欢吗？一个都不喜欢)/ --Which do you like best? –All of them!(你最喜欢哪个？全部。)
七、介词：
1、介词的主要用法：
介词是一种虚词,不能独立使用。介词之后一般有名词或代词(宾格)或相当于名词的其他词类、短语或从句作它
的宾语,即构成介词短语。有些介词是由两个以上的词构成的短语介词,如：out of(从…中出来), because of(因为),
away from(距离…), on top of(在…顶上), ever since(自从…), next to(在…隔壁), according to(根据…), in front
of(在…前方)等。
2、介词的分类表： (见下表)
地点(位置、范围)介词：above 在…前, about 在…附近, across 在…对面, after 在…后面, against 倚着..., along 在…近
旁, among 在…中间, around 在…周围, round 在….周围, at 在…处, before 在...前, behind 在...后, below 低于..., beside
在...旁边, between 在...之间, by 在...旁, down 在...下面, from 来自..., in 在...里面, inside 在...里面, near 靠近..., of 在...
之中, on 在...上面, out of 在...之外, outside 在....外面, over 在....上方, under 在...下方, up 在...上面, on top of 在...顶部,
in front of 在...前, close to 靠近..., in the middle of 在...的中间, at the end of 在...的末端,等等。
方向(目标趋向)介词：across 横越..., against 对抗..., along 沿着..., around 绕着..., round 环绕..., at 朝着..., behind 向…
后面, etween…and…从…到...,by 路过/通过..., down 向…下, for 向..., from 从/离..., in 进入..., into 进入..., inside 到...
里面, near 接近..., off 脱离/除..., on 向...上, out of 向...外, outside 向....外, over 跨过..., past 经过/超过..., through 穿过...,
to 向/朝..., towards 朝着..., on to 到...上面, onto 到...上面, up 向...上, away from 远离...
时间介词：about 大约..., after 在…以后, at 在… (时刻), before 在…以前, by 到…为止, during 在…期间, for 有…(之
久), from 从…(时)起, in 在(上/下午);在(多久)以后, on 在(某日), past 过了…(时), since 自从…(至今), through 贯
穿…(期间), till 直到…时, until 直到…时, to 到(下一时刻), ever since 从那时起至今,at the beginning of 在...开始时 ,at
the end of 在...末 , in the middle of 在...当中 ,at the time of 在...时
方式介词：as 作为/当作..., by 用/由/乘坐/被..., in 用…(语言), like 与…一样, on 骑(车)/徒(步),通过(收音机/电视机),
over 通过(收音机), through 通过..., with 用(材料),用(手/脚/耳/眼), without 没有…
涉及介词: about 关于..., except 除了…, besides 除了…还... for 对于/就…而言, in 在…(方面), of…的,有关..., on 关于/
有关..., to 对…而言, towards 针对..., with 就…而言
其它介词:
【目的介词】 for 为了..., from 防止…, to 为了…
【原因介词】 for 因为..., with 由于…, because of 因为...
【比较介词】 as 与…一样,like 象…一样,than 比...,to 与…相比, unlike 与…不同
【伴随/状态介词】 against 和…一起(比赛),at 在(上班/休息/上学/家,etc.),in 穿着…(衣服/颜色),into 变成...,on 在
(值日), with 与…一起,有/带着/长着..., without 没有/无/不与…一起
3、介词短语的句法作用：
介词短语相当于一个形容词或副词,可用作状语、定语和表语。如：The man came <down the stairs> .(状)(那个人走
下楼来)/The woman <with a flower on her head> is from the countryside.(定)(头上戴花的妇女来自乡下)/The teacher
is now with the pupils.(表)(老师现在和学生在一起)
4、介词短语在句子中的位置：
介词短语做状语时,如果表示时间/地点,可以放在句首或句尾,如果表示方向/方式/伴随/涉及/原因/目的/比较,一般放
在句尾； 介词短语作表语时放在连系动词之后；介词短语作定语时,只能放在被修饰的名词之后。如：He wanted to
find a good job in Shanghai the next year.(状语)(他想来年在上海找份好工作)/ They searched the room for the
thief.(他们在房间里搜索小偷) / The letters are for you.(表语)(信是给你的)/ Have you seen a cat with a black head
and four white legs?(定语)(你看见一只黑头白腿的猫了吗？)
5、重要注释：
⑴ this / that / these / those / last / next / a / every / each 等词构成的时间短语,前面不用任何介词。如：Every year
travellers from abroad come to visit Pingyao.(每年都有国外的游客来游览平窑镇)/ He had a bad cold that
week.(那个星期他患重感冒)
⑵ for 有时用来引出动词不定式的逻辑主语,常翻译成“对于…而言”。如：It’s too hard for me to finish the work in
83
only one hour.(让我在区区一个小时内完成这项工作太难了)/ The house is big enough for 10 men to live in.(房
子够大的可以容10 个人住)
⑶ of 有时用来表示后面的人物正好是前面的表语的逻辑主语。如：It’s very nice/kind of you to do so.(你这么做真是
太好了)
⑷ 介词有时会与它的宾语分离,而且宾语前置。
① 当宾语是疑问词时。Who are you talking about?(你们在谈论谁？)
② 宾语在从句中当连接词时。He has a younger brother who he must take good care of.(他有 一个需要他照顾
的小弟。) / Do you know who our teacher is talking with over there?(你知道我们的老师在那边和什么人谈话
吗？)
③ 动词不定式作定语且该动词为不及物动词,后面有介词。I finally found a chair to sit on.(我 最终找到了一张
椅子坐。)
(5) 记住一些固定词组：arrive at/in(到达…),on foot(步行),not…at all(根本不),to the north of(在…以北),in the east
of(在…的东部),in the night(在夜间),at night(在晚上),be afraid of(害怕…),be full of(充满/ 装满….),be filled
with(充满/ 装满….),be good/bad for(对…有益/有害),be made of(由…做成),be made from(由…制造),play with(玩
耍……),look out of(朝…外面看),at the end of(在…末梢/结束时),by the end of(不迟于…/到…末为止),with the help
of 或with one’s help(在…的帮助下),look after(照料…),look for(寻找…),on a bike(=by bike)骑车, help sb. with(帮某
人做…),get on (well) with(与某人相处[融洽]),等等。
6、某些介词的用法辨析：
⑴ 时间或地点介词in、on、at 的用法区别：表示时间时, in 表示在一段时间里(在将来时句子中则表示在一段时间之
后), on 表示在具体的某一天或者某天的上下午等, at 表示在某个时刻或者瞬间； 表示地点时, in 表示在某个范
围之内, on 表示在某个平面上或与一个面相接触,at 则表示在某个具体的场所或地点。如：He was born on the
morning of May 10th.(他出生于五月十日的早晨)/ I usually get up at 7：00 in the morning.(我通常在早上的七点钟
起床) / His glasses are right on his nose.(他的眼镜就架在他的鼻子上)/ He is at the cinema at the moment.(此刻他
正在电影院)
⑵ after 与in 表示时间的用法区别：“after+(具体时刻/从句)”表示“在…时刻之后”常用于一般时态；“in+(一段时
间)”表示“在(多久)之后”,常用于将来时态。如：He said that he would be here after 6：00.(他说他六点钟之后
会来这儿)/ My father is coming back from England in about a month.(我父亲大约一个月以后从英国回来)
⑶ since 与for 表示时间的用法区别：“since+(具体时刻/that-从句)”表示“自从…起一直到现在”,“for +(一段斶间)”
表示“总共有…之久”,都常用于完成时态；如：Uncle Li has worked in this factory since 1970. (李叔叔自从1970
年起就在这家工厂工作了)/ Uncle Li has worked in this factory for over 30 years. (李叔叔在这家工厂已经工作了
30 多年)
⑷ by、in 与with 表示方式的用法区别：都可以表示“工具、手段”,但是by 主要表示“乘坐”某个交通工具或“以……
方式”,在被动句中可以表示动作的执行者；in 表示“使用”某种语言/文字,with 表示“使用”某个具体的工具、
手段。如：We see with our eyes and walk with our feet.(我们用眼睛看东西,用双脚走路)/ Please write that article(文
章) in English.(请你用英语写那篇文章)/ Let’s go to the zoo by taxi.(我们打的去动物园吧。)/ It was written by Lao
She.(那是老舍写的)
⑸ about 与on 的用法区别：都可以表示“有关…”,但是about 的意义比较广,而on 主要表示“有关…(专题/课程)”。
如：Tom is going to give a talk on the history of America.(汤姆要作一个美国历史的报告)/ They are very excited
talking about the coming field trip.(他们兴致勃勃地谈论着即将来到的野外旅游)
⑹ through 与across、over 的用法区别： through 指“穿过…(门洞/人群/树林)”； across 和over 可以指“跨越…(街
道/河流)”,可互换,但是表示“翻过…”时只能用over. 如：Just then a rat (鼠)ran across the road.(就在那时一只
老鼠跑过路面)/ There is a bridge across/over the river.(河上有座桥)/ They climbed over the mountain and arrived
there ahead of time.(他们翻过大山提前到达了那里)/ The visitors went through a big gate into another park.(参观者
们穿过一个大门来到另一个公园)
(7)as 与like 的区别：两个词都表示“像……”,但是as 译为“作为……”,表示的是职业、职务、作用等事实,而like
译为“像……一样”,表示外表,不是事实。如：Let me speak to you as a father.(我以父亲的身份和你讲话。)(说话
者是听者的父亲) / Let me speak to you like a father.(让我像一位父亲一样和你讲话)(说话者不是听者的父亲)
(8)at the end of、by the end of、to the end、in the end 的用法区别：at the end of…既可以表示时间也可以表示地点,
译为“在…末；在…尽头”,常与过去时连用；by the end of…只能表示时间,译为“在…前；到…为止”,常用于
过去完成时； in the end 与at last 基本等义,表示“终于、最后”,通常用于过去时；to the end 译为“到…的终点
为止”,前面往往有表示运动或连续性的动词。如：By the end of last term we had learned 16 units of Book III. (到
上学期期末我们已经学习了第三册16 个单元)/ At the end of the road you can find a big white house with brown
windows.(在路的尽头你能找到一幢有棕色窗户的白房子)/ They left for Beijing at the end of last week.(上周末他们
84
动身去了北京)/ In the end he succeeded in the final exams.(他最终在期末考试中考及格了)/ We should go on with
the work to the end.(我们应该把工作干到底)/ Follow this road to the end and you will see a post office. (沿这条路走
到底就能看见一家邮电局)
(9)for a moment、for the moment、in a moment、at the moment 的区别：for a moment“一会儿、片刻”(=for a while),
常与持续性动词连用；for the moment“暂时、目前”,常用于现在时；in a moment“一会儿、立即、马上”(=soon;
in a few minutes),一般用于将来时；at the moment“此刻,眼下”(=now),用于现在进行时。如：Please wait for a
moment.(请稍等)/ Let’s leave things as they are for the moment.(暂时就维持现状吧！) / I’ll come back in a
moment.(我过会儿回来)/ I am very busy at the moment.(眼下我很忙)
(10)but 的问题：用介词but 引出另一个动词时,要注意：如果前面有do,后面就用原形动词,前面没有do 时,后面的动
词要加to。如：I could do nothing but wait.(我什么也做不了只能等) / They had no choice(选择) but to fight.(他们
没有选择只有战斗)
(11)in front of 与in the front of： in front of“在…的前面”, 与in the front of“在…的前部”。如：A car was parking
in front of the hall.(大厅跟前停着一辆汽车)/ In the front of the hall stood a big desk.(大厅前部立着一个大讲台)
(12)except 与besides 的区别：except“除了”,表示排除掉某人物,即不包含；而besides“除了”则表示包含,即“不仅……
又……”。如：Everyone went to the Palace Museum except Tom.(除了Tom,大家都去了故宫博物院)(Tom 没有去故
宫)/ Besides Chinese he also studied many other subjects.(除了汉语之外,他还学其他许多功课)(“汉语”也是他学
的功课之一)
八、动词
1、动词的分类：
类 别
意 义
例 句
实义动词
含有实在的意义,表示动作或状态,在句子
中能独立作谓语。
She has some bananas. 她吃些香蕉。
They eat a lot of potatoes. 他们常吃土豆。
I’m reading an English book now.
我现在正看一本英文书。
连系动词
本身有一定的词义,但不能独立作谓语,必
须和表语一起构成谓语。
His father is a teacher.他父亲是教师。
Twins usually look the same.
双胞胎通常看起来一样。
The teacher became very angry. 老师变得很
生气。
助动词
本身没有词义,不能独立作谓语,只能和主
要动词一起构成谓语动词,用来表示否定、
疑问、时态、语态或其它语法形式,助动词
自身有人称、单复数和时态的变化。
He doesn’t speak English. 他不说英语。
We are playing basketball. 我们在打篮球。
Do you have a brother? 你有兄弟吗？
情态动词
本身有一定的意义,不能独立作谓语,只能
和主要动词一起构成谓语动词,表示说话人
的语气和情态。情态动词没有人称和单复
数的变化,有些情态动词有过去式。
You can keep the books for two weeks.
这些书你可以借两个星期。
May I smoke here? 我可以在这儿抽烟吗？
We must go now. 我们现在得走了。
★重要注解：
(1) 关于实义动词：
① 英语的实义动词又可分为及物动词和不及物动词两大类：
后面必须跟宾语意义才完整的叫及物动词；本身意义完整,后面不需跟宾语的叫不及物动词。
② 有些动词通常只作不及物动词。如：go,come,happen,lie,listen,rise,arrive,hall 等。
有些动词通常用作及物动词。如：say, raise, lay, find, buy 等。
③ 大多数动词可以兼作及物动词和不及物动词。如：study, sing 等。
④ 有些动词作及物动词与作不及物动词时的意义有所不同。如：know, wash 等。
⑤ 有些动词常和介词 、副词或其它词类一起构成固定词组,形成短语动词。如：listen,reply,wait,look.
(2) 关于连系动词：
① 连系动词用来连接主语和表语,连系动词后面常为形容词。
② 常见的连系动词有：be、become、look、feel、sound、smell、taste、seem、turn、grow、get、 go、fall、sit、
85
stand、lie 等。
③ 有些连系动词来源于实义动词,意思也跟着变化：look(看→看起来)、feel(感觉、摸→感到)、 smell(闻、嗅→
闻起来)、taste(尝→尝起来)、turn(翻转、转动→变得)、grow(生长→变得)、get(得到、到达→变得)、go(去→
变得),所不同的是,作为实义动词时,后面不能跟形容词。
[注释]
become、get、go、be、grow、turn 的用法区别：become 表示“变成”,比较正式,通常不用将来时表示动作已经
完成。get 也表示动作已经完成,但是更加口语化,通常表示温度、时间、岁数等变化。go 表示“变得”,常见于某
些短语中,后面常有形容词bad、blind、hungry 等。be 表示“是、成为、当”,多用于将来时、祈使句或不定式中。
grow 表示“变得”,常指逐渐的变化,表示身高、岁数的增长。turn 表示“变得”,指变为与原先不同的情况,通常
指颜色等变化。如：I was caught in the rain and I became ill.(我淋雨感冒了)/ He has got rich.(他变富了)/ He will be
a scientist in the future.(将来他将成为科学家)/ My little brother has grown much taller in the past year.(在过去的一
年里我的弟弟长得高多了)/ The sandwich has gone bad.(那块三明治已经变坏)/ Her face turned red after her
mother criticized(批评) her.(妈妈批评了他以后他的脸变红了)
(3) 关于助动词：
①常见的助动词有：用于进行时和被动语态的be (am, is, are ,was, were, been, being ) ;用于完成时的
have(has,had,having) ;用于将来时的shall (should) ; will (would)和用于一般时的do(does,did) .
②助动词必须同主语的人称和数一致,也就是说因主语人称、数的不同而采用不同的形式,其中有些助动词也可作情
态动词。如：shall, will, should, would.
(4) 关于情态动词：
①常见的情态动词有：can (could) ,may (might), must ,shall (should), will (would), dare (dared) , need 等,另外,have to、
had better 也当作情态动词使用。情态动词后面必须加动词的原形。
②can 表示体力、脑力方面的能力或客观的可能性。口语中, 在询问或说明一件事可不可以做时,常用“can”代替
“may”。情态动词“can”的过去式是“could”,否定式是“cannot”通常缩写成“can’t”,“could”的否定式是
“could not”,通常缩写成“couldn’t”。如：Can I help you?(要帮忙吗？)/ He can swim.(他会游泳)/ That can’t be Mr
Li.(那不可能是李先生)
③ may 表示允许、请求或可能性,用may 提问时,肯定回答一般用Certainly 或Yes,you may.;否定回答一般用can’t
或mustn’t. 如：May I ask you a question?—Certainly.(可以问你一个问题吗？当然可以)/ You may go now.(现在你
可以走了)/ It may be in your pocket.(它可能在你的衣袋里)
④ must 表示“必须”、“一定”的意思。表示“必须”时否定形式是mustn’t；表示“一定”时,否定形式是“can’t”
如：We must be very careful when we cross the road.(我们过马路时一定要非常小心)/ It must be Jack.(那准是杰克)/
I haven’t seen Kate today. She can’t be here.(我今天没有看到过凯特,她不可能在这里)
[注意]用must(必须)进行提问时,肯定回答用must,否定回答用needn’t；用must(一定)进行提问时,肯定回答仍用
must,但是否定回答用can’t.如：Must we clean the room before we leave? –Yes,you must.或No,you needn’t.(我们走
之前必须要打扫房间吗？是的,必须打扫。/ 不,不需要。) / Must she be in the romm? –Yes,she must.或No,she
can’t.(她一定在房间里吗？是的,一定。/ 不,不可能在。)
⑤ “have to”表示“不得不”、“必须”。We’ll have to leave now for it is very late at night.
have to 的疑问形式是：助动词+…+have to,否定形式是：助动词+not+have to 或者用needn’t.如：Do you have to stay
until 8 o’clock?(你得呆到8 点钟吗？)/ You don’t have to do so.(=You needn’t do so.)(你不用这么做)
⑥ shall 在问句中,可表示征求对方意见,与第一人称连用；在陈述句的第二、三人称的主语后或表示“命令”、“警
告”、“允许”等。如：Shall we go to the zoo this weekend?(我们这个周末去动物园好吗？)/ He shall bring his own
book next time.(他下次必须带自己的书来)
⑦ should 可表示“劝告”、“建议”、“惊奇”等意思。We should speak to old people politely.(我们应该礼貌地对老人
讲话)
⑧ will 表示“意愿”、“决心”等意思,一般与第二人称连用。如：Will you please close the door for me?(请你替我把
门关上好吗？)/ I will teach you a lesson.(我要教训你一顿)
⑨would 表示过去的“意愿”、“决心”等。He would sit near the fire every time he returned home.(每次他回到家中
总要坐在火炉边)
would 也可以表示现在的情况,表达说话人向对方提出的要求,语气比“will”婉转、客气。在日常会话中,“我想
要…”通常用“I would like to”或“I should(I’d) like to”来表示。如：Would you like to have a rest at the
moment?(你现在想要休息一下吗？)
would 还可以表示过去经常发生的事情。如：Every year parents would tell their children about the boy who would
save his people.(每一年父母们总是向孩子们讲述这个将会拯救他的人民的男孩的事)
⑩ need 表示“需要”,用于疑问句或否定句。
“need”作实义动词时,在肯定、否定、疑问句中都可以用。如：He needn’t
86
do it in such a hurry.(他不需要如此匆忙地做这件事)/ He needs some help.(他需要一些帮助)/ He doesn’t need to
bring his football socks then.(那么他就无须带上足球袜了)
⑾ dare 是“敢”的意思,用法几乎与“need”完全相同,即在疑问句和否定句中,可以作情态动词,后面用不带“to”
的动词不定式。在肯定句中和实义动词一样,后面的动词不定式要带“to”。How dare you say I am a fool?(你竟敢
说我是个傻瓜？)/ He didn’t dare to touch the red button.(他不敢触碰那个红色的按钮)
⑿ ‘d better (do)(“最好是”)一般也当作情态动词使用,否定式是：’d better not (do). 如：You’d better sit here and say
nothing.(你最好坐在这儿不讲话)/ You’d better not speak because he is sleeping.(你最好不要讲话因为他正在睡觉)
2、动词词形变化一览表：
(1)规则动词变化表：
规
则
变
化
原形动词结尾情况
现在时单三人称
现 在 分 词
过去式和过去分词
一般情况
+s
+ing
+ed
s,x,ch,sh,o 结尾
+es
+ing
+ed
辅音字母+y 结尾
y→i,+es
+ing
y→i,+ed
重读闭音节一元一辅
结尾
+s
双写辅音字母,+ing
双写辅音字母,+ed
不发音的e 结尾
+s
去掉e,+ing
+d
ie 结尾
+s
ie→y,+ing
+d
不
规
则
变
化
have→has；be→is (无)
(见不规则动词变化
表)
注意：①在加ing 或ed 时动词如果以“r”结尾,尾音节又重读的动词,“r”应双写。
②s/es 的读音规则：在清辅音后读[s]；在浊辅音后和元音后读[z]；在[ s ]、[ F]、[z]、[tF]、[dV]后读[iz].
③ed 的读音规则：在清辅音后读[t]；在浊辅音后和元音后读[d]；在[t]、[d]后读[id].
(2)不规则动词变化表：( 原形 → 过去式 → 过去分词)
be(am,is)
was
been
lose
lost
lost
be(are)
were
been
make
made
made
beat
beat
beaten
may
might
become
became
become
mean
meant
meant
begin
began
begun
meet
met
met
blow
blew
blown
mistake
mistook
mistaken
break
broke
broken
must
must
bring
brought
brought
pay
paid
paid
build
built
built
put
put
put
buy
bought
bought
read
read
Read
can
could
ride
rode
ridden
catch
caught
caught
ring
rang
rung
choose
chose
chosen
rise
rose
risen
come
came
come
run
ran
run
cost
cost
cost
say
said
said
cut
cut
cut
see
saw
seen
dig
dug
dug
sell
sold
sold
do
did
done
send
sent
sent
draw
drew
drawn
set
set
set
drink
drank
drunk
shall
should
87
drive
drove
driven
shine
shone
shone
eat
ate
eaten
show
showed
shown
fall
fell
fallen
shut
shut
shut
feel
felt
felt
sing
sang
sung
find
found
found
sink
sank/sunk
sunk/sunken
fly
flew
flown
sit
set
set
forget
forgot
forgot/forgotten
sleep
slept
slept
freeze
froze
frozen
smell
smelt
smelt
get
got
got
speak
spoke
spoken
give
gave
given
spend
spent
spent
go
went
gone
spill
spilt
spilt
grow
grew
grown
spoil
spoilt
spoilt
hang
hung/hanged
hung/hanged
stand
stood
stood
have(has)
had
had
sweep
swept
swept
hear
heard
heard
swim
swam
swum
hide
hid
hidden
take
took
taken
hit
hit
hit
teach
taught
taught
hold
held
held
tell
told
told
hurt
hurt
hurt
think
thought
thought
keep
kept
kept
throw
threw
thrown
know
knew
known
understand
understood
understood
lay
laid
laid
wake
woke/waked
woken/waked
learn
learnt/learned
learnt/learned
wear
wore
worn
leave
left
left
will
would
lend
lent
lent
win
won
won
let
let
let
write
wrote
witten
lie
lay
lain
3、be(“是/存在”)动词的各种时态变化：
一 般 现 在 时
一 般 将 来 时
现 在 完 成 时
I am….
You are.…
He/She/It is….
We/You/They are….
(I 等各人称) will be….
I am
He/She/It is going to be…
We/You/They are
I have been….
You have been….
She/he/It has been….
We/You/They have been….
一 般 过 去 时
过 去 将 来 时
过 去 完 成 时
I was….
You were.…
He/She/It was….
We/You/They were….
(I 等各人称) would be….
I was
He/She/It was going to be…
We/You/They were
I had been….
You had been….
She/he/It had been….
We/You/They had been….
注意：句型变化时,
否定句在am /is /are /will /have /has /was /were /had /would 后面加not,而且not 都可缩写为n’t (am 后面not 不
可以缩写)；
疑问句将am /is /are /will /have /has /was /were /had /would 提前到句首。
88
4、其它谓语动词(主动语态)时态变化一览表：
现在
时态
一 般 现 在 时
现 在 进 行 时
一 般 将 来 时
现 在 完 成 时
谓语动
词构成
动词用原形(单三
加s / es)
(问句和否定句借
用助词do / does)
am
is +动词-ing
are
will + 动词原形
am
is +going to+动词原形
are
have +过去分词
has
过去
时态
一 般 过 去 时
过 去 进 行 时
过 去 将 来 时
过 去 完 成 时
谓语动
词构成
动词用过去式
(问句和否定句借
用助词did)
was
+动词-ing
were
would + 动词原形
was
+going to+动词原形
were
had +过去分词
5、八种时态的具体用法：
(1) 一般现在时 表示现阶段经常或习惯发生的动作或存在的状态,或说明主语的特征。
① 一般现在时句子中常有的时间状语：often,usually,sometimes,always,every (day 等), once/twice,a (week
等), on (Sunday 等),never,in the (morning 等)。如：They go to the Palace Museum once a year.(他们每年去
一次故宫)/ They often discuss business in the evening.(他们经常在晚上商谈生意)
② 表示客观真理、事实、人的技能或现在的状态时句子里一般不用时间状语。如：The earth turns round the
sun.(地球绕着太阳转)/ Light travels faster than sound.(光传播比声音快)
③ 表示十分确定会发生(如安排好的事情)或按照时间表进行的事情,用一般现在可以表达将来,句子中可以有
将来时间。如：The train for Haikou leaves at 8：00 in the morning.(开往汉口的列车上午8 点开车)
④ 在时间状语从句中(以when, after, before, while, until, as soon as 等引导)和条件状语从句中(以if,unless 引
导),用一般现在时代替一般将来时,句子可以有将来时间。如：Please ring me up as soon as you arrive in
Germany.(你一到德国就给我打电话) / If it rains tomorrow,we will have to stay at home.(如果明天下雨我们
就只好呆在家)
⑤ 一般现在时用于倒装句中可以表示正在发生的动作,动词以come, go 为主。如：Here comes the bus. (车来了)
/ There goes the bell.(铃响了)。
⑥ 一般现在时常用于体育比赛的解说或寓言故事中。Now the midfield player catches the ball and he keeps it.
⑦ 人的心理活动和感官动作一般用一般现在时而不用现在进行时表达,常见动词有：like, love, hate, dislike,
want, wish, hope, think(认为),understand, remember, forget, mean, need, hear, feel, see. 如：I think it is going
to snow.(我想天要下雪了)/ I really hope you can enjoy your stay here.(我真的希望你愉快地呆在这儿)
(2) 一般过去时 表示过去某时发生的动作或状态,这种动作或状态可能是一次性,也可能经常
发生。
① 表示过去具体时刻发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有：at (eight) (yesterday morning),(ten minutes) ago, when
引导的时间状语从句。如：I got up at 6：00 this morning.(我是早上六点钟起床的)/ Little Tom broke the
window at half past nine this morning.(小汤姆今天早上九点半把窗子打破了)/ When he went into the
room,he saw a stranger talking with his father.(他走进房间时发现一个陌生人正和他父亲谈话)
② 表示过去一段时间内不知何时发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有：yesterday, last (year 等), in (1998 等)。如：
He came to our city in the year 2000.(他2000 年来到我们市)
③ 表示过去一个阶段中经常发生的事情时,时间状语有：last…, in…, from…to…, for(10 years),often,usually,
sometimes, always, never 等。如：Mr Jackson usually went to evening schools when he was young. / Every day
he went to the rich man and borrowed books from him.
④ 讲故事、对过去经历的回忆、双方都明白的过去事件等一般用过去时,而且经常省略时间状语。如：I
happened to meet Rose in the street.(我正好在街上遇到露西)
(3) 一般将来时 表示将来某一时刻或经常发生的动作或状态。
89
①一般将来时的时间状语有：tomorrow,this (afternoon),next (year),one day,now,soon,
someday,sometime, in the future, when 引导的从句等。
② 用will 构成的将来时,表示动作与人的主观愿望无关。“shall”用于第一人称,“will”
用于所有人称。如：I will graduate from this school soon.(我很快就要从这所中学毕业了)/ You will stay alone
after I leave.(我走了之后你就要一个人过了)
③ “am/is/are going to+动词原形”表示打算或准备要做的事情,或者主观判断即将要发生的事情,而“am/is/are
to +动词原形”表示安排或计划中的动作。如：A man told them that the woman was to give birth to the special
baby.(有一个人告诉他们那个妇女就会生下那个特别的男孩)/ It’s going to rain soon.(天快要下雨了)
④ 表示一个人临时决定要做某事,可以用will 表达。如：I will go to the lab to get some
chemicals(化学药剂). So please wait until I return.(我要到化学实验室去取些药品,请等我回头)
⑤ 现在进行时、一般现在时也可以表示将来。(见相应时态)
⑥ shall 和will 在口语的一些疑问句中相当于情态动词。Shall 一般与第一人称连用,will 与第二人称连用。
如：Shall we go to the zoo next Saturday?(我们下周六去动物园好吗？)/ Will you please open the door for
me?(替我把门打开好吗？)
⑦ “be to +动词原形”表示按照计划将要发生的事情。如：An angel came to tell her that she was to have this
special boy.
(4)现在进行时 现在进行时表示现在正在进行的动作或是现阶段正发生而此刻不一定在进行的动作。
① 现在进行时由“助动词be (am is are ) +现在分词”构成。
② 现在进行时的时间状语有： now, this …, these…等,但经常不用。如：What are you doing up in the tree?(你
在树上干什么？)/ I am writing a long novel these days.(我最近在写一本长篇小说)
③ 表示即将发生的动作,一般指近期安排好的事情。常见的动词有：come, go, stay, leave, spend, do 等。如：I’m
coming now.(我就来)/ What are you doing tomorrow?(你明天干什么？)/ He is leaving soon.(他就要走了)
④ 表示频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always 等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。如：
He is always borrowing money from me and forgetting all about it some time later.(他老是向我借钱,过一些
时候就忘得一干二净)
初一：
1.— Where is your mum?
— She _______ at the kitchen.
(5)过去进行时 过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某阶段正在进行的动作。
① 过去进行时由“was(第一、三人称单数)或were(第二人称单数和各人称的复数)+现在分词”构成。
② 过去进行时的时间状语有：then, at that time, this time yesterday, at (eight) yesterday (morning),(a year) ago,
以及由when 引出的时间状语从句。如：He was cooking supper this time yesterday.(昨天这个时候他正在做
晚饭)/ The little girl was playing with her toy when I saw her.(我看到小女孩的时候她正在玩玩具)
③ 用于宾语从句或时间状语从句中,表示与主句动作同时进行而且是延续时间较长。句子中通常不用时间状
语。如：She was it happen when she was walking past.(她路过时看到事情的发生)/ They sang a lot of songs
while they were walking in the dark forest.(他们在黑暗的森林里走时唱了很多歌)
④ 也可以表示过去一个阶段频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always 等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨
厌等感情色彩。如：He was always borrowing money from me when he lived here.(他住在这里时老向我借
钱)
(6)现在完成时 现在完成时表示一个发生在过去的、对现在仍有影响的动作,或表示开始在过去,并且一直延续到现
在,甚至还可能延续下去的动作。
①在完成时由“助动词have (has)+动词的过去分词”构成。
②表示发生在过去的对现在仍有影响的动作时,时间状语有：already, yet, just, once, twice,ever, never,three times,
before 等。如：I have never seen such fine pictures before. (我以前从来没有看过这么好的画)/ He has just gone
to England.(他刚去英国)
③表示在过去开始一直延续到现在(可能延续下去)的动作或状态时,时间状语有：for (two years),since 1990,
since (two weeks ago)和since 引导的状语从句。如：I have been away from my hometown for thirty years.(我离
开家乡有30 年了)/ Uncle Wang has worked in the factory since it opened.(自从这家工厂开张,王叔叔一直在那
儿工作)
90
④口语中have got 往往表示have(有)的意思。如：They have got thousands of books in their library.(他们图书馆
有上万本书)
⑤have been to 与have gone to 的区别：have gone to(“已经去了”)表示人不在这里,have been to(“去过”)表
示人在这里。如：--Where is Mr Li? –He has gone to the UK.(李先生在哪里？他去了英国。)/ --Do you know
something about Beijing? –Yes,I have been to Beijing three times. (你知道北京的情况吗？是的,我去过那里三
次。)
⑥在完成时中,一个瞬间性动词(一次性动作)不能与表示一段时间的状语连用,此时须将该瞬间动词改为延续性
动词或状态动词。具体变化见下表：
瞬间性动词的完成时
→
延续性动词或状态动词的完成时
have
(already) gone to…
have
been in / at …
for (two years)
has
come to…
has
been here
since (1990)
(had)
left…
(had)
been away from…
arrived…
been in…
died
been dead
begun
been on
ended
been over
bought...
had…
borrowed…
kept…
joined…
been in …
或者使用下面这个句型：
It is / has been + (多久)+ since + 主语(人)+谓语(过去时)+……+过去时间状语
[注意] 在其它的时态中也存在类似问题,记住,关键是：瞬间动词不能和表达一段时间的状语连用。如：How long
may I keep the book?(这本书我能借多久？)(句子中keep 取代了borrow)
(7) 过去完成时 过去完成时表示过去某一时间或某一动作发生之前已经完成的动作。简言之, 过去完成时所表示的
时间是“过去的过去”。
①过去完成时由“助动词had+动词的过去分词”构成。
②过去完成时时间状语有：by (yesterday), by then, by the end of (last…)或者由when,before 等引出状语从句。有
时句子中会有already, just, once, ever, never 等词语,也会有for… 或since…构成的时间状语。如：They had
already finished cleaning the classroom when their teacher came.(当老师来的时候他们已经打扫完了教室)/
The woman had left before he realized she was a cheat.(在他发觉那个妇女是个骗子时她已经走掉了)
③过去完成时常用于宾语从句中、after 引导的从句中,或者从句是before 引导的主句中。如：After I had put on
my shoes and hat,I walked into the darkness. (我穿上鞋子戴上帽子走进了黑暗之中)/ He said that he had never
seen a kangaroo before.(他说他以前从来没有见过袋鼠)
(8) 过去将来时 过去将来时表示在过去预计将要发生的动作或存在的状态。
①过去将来时由“助动词should(第一人称)或would(第二、三人称)+动词原形”构成。在美国英语中,过去将
来时的助动词一律用“would +动词原形”。
②过去将来时常由于宾语从句中,时间状语有：later, soon, the next (day).
③在时间状语从句和条件状语从句中不可以使用过去将来时,而应该使用一般过去时。如：He promised that he
would pay me a lot if I helped him with the project.(他答应付给我许多钱如果我帮助他搞那个项目)/ Every
time when he was free,he would sit down and read some books.(每次只要他有空他就会坐下来看看书)
④表示纯粹的将来时用would 或should,表示打算或主观认为的事情用was/were going to (+动词原形)。如：She
told me she would be 18 the next month. (她告诉我她下个月就18 岁了)/ She told me that she was going to have
a walk with her pet dog.(她告诉我她打算带她的宠物狗去散步)
⑤过去将来时还可以表示一个过去经常性的动作。如：When it rained in the day, he would bring an umbrella
with him.(白天下雨时他会随身带一把雨伞)
(9)现在完成进行时：现在完成进行时指一个从过去就开始一直延续到现在并由可能继续下去的动作,它具有现在完
成时和现在进行时双重特征,结构是：
“have/has + been +动词的现在分词”。如：I have been swimming in the cold
91
water for about two hours.(我已经在冰冷的水里游了将近两个小时)/ How long have you been waiting here?(你
在这里一直等了多久？)
6、被动语态：
(1)被动语态定义：被动语态是动词的一种特殊形式,用来说明主语与谓语动词之间的关系。如果主语是 动作的
执行者(即某人做某事),便叫主动语态；如果主语是动作的承受者(即某事被做),便叫被动语态。主动与被动的区
别不是词序的区别,而是主语与谓语意义上的区别。在英语中只有及物动词和一些相当于及物动词的词组才有被
动语态的形式。
(2)英语中被动语态由“助动词be +动词的过去分词”构成。助动词be 有时态、人称和数的变化。被动语态后的
by 短语有时可省去。具体结构见下表：
现在时态 一般现在时
现在进行时
一 般 将 来 时
现在完成时
谓语动词
构 成
am
is +p.p.
are
am
is +being+p.p.
are
will + be+p.p.
am
is +going to+ be + p.p.
are
have(has)
+been+p.p.
过去时态 一般过去时
过 去 进 行 时
过 去 将 来 时
过去完成时
谓语动词
构 成
was +p.p.
were
was
+being+p.p.
were
would +be+p.p.
was +going to+be+p.p.
were
had +been+p.p.
[注] p.p.表示过去分词。
(1) 被动语态的用法：
① 不知道谁是动作的执行者(即不知道谁做)时用被动语态,省略by短语。如：A man was killed in the accident.(一
个人死于事故)/ This window was broken yesterday.(这扇窗子是昨天被打破的)
②不说或者众所周知是谁做时,用被动语态,省略by 短语。如：Rice is also grown in this place.(这个地方也种水
稻)/ A railroad will be built here in three years.(三年之后这里将要修建一条铁路)
③强调动作的承受者,句尾加by 短语。如：It was written by Lu Xun.(它(书)是鲁迅写的)/ A pet dog is never killed
by its owner.(宠物狗是不会被主人宰杀的)
(2) 主动语态如何改写为被动语态：
主动句： 主语(人/物) + 谓语(及物动词) + 宾语(人/物) + 其他 + 状语
(动作的执行者) (各种时态形式) (动作的承受者)
被动句： 主语(人/物) + 谓语(及物动词) + by +人 / 物 + 其他 + 状语
(动作的承受者) (be +过去分词) (动作的执行者)
(3) 注意点：
①“动词+间接宾语+直接宾语”改为被动时,可以用间接宾语做被动句的主语。如：
His teacher gave him a dictionary.→He was given a dictionary by his teacher.(老师给他一本字典→他得到老师
一本字典)
也可以用直接宾语做被动句的主语,但是需用to 或者for 引出原句的间接宾语。如：His teacher gave him a
dictionary.→A dictionary was given to him by his teacher.(老师给他一本字典→一本字典由老师送给了他)/His
father made him a kite.→A kite was made for him by his father.(他的父亲给他做了一个风筝→一个风筝由他的
92
父亲做给了他)
②“动词+宾语+动词原形”改为被动时,动词原形前要加to.如：The boss made the poor man work 12 hours a day.
→The poor man was made to work 12 hours a day.(老板让这个可怜的人一天工作12 小时→这个可怜人被迫一
天工作12 小时)
③“动词+…+介词”改为被动时,介词一般在原位不动。如：The girl takes good care of her little brother.→The girl’s
little brother is taken good care of by her.(女孩照顾小弟弟→女孩的小弟弟由她照顾着)
④“be+过去分词”未必表示被动语态,而可能是系表结构。如：
He is pleased / worried / tired /…….(系表)(他高兴/焦虑/疲劳……)
He was hit / knocked down / told / shot / …….(被动)(他被击中/撞倒/关照/射中……)
7、动词的非谓语形式：动词不做谓语时的固定形式。
(1)动词的非谓语形式包括动词不定式、动名词和分词三种形式；其中分词又包含现在分词和过去分词两种形式。它
们在句子中不能单独作谓语。
(2)动词不定式：
① 形式：动词不定式基本形式由“不定式记号to+动词原形”构成。它的否定形式只要在“to” 前面加上“not”。
它的疑问形式是：“wh-疑问词+to+动词原形”。*它的被动形式：“to be +过去分词”。*它的完成形式：“to have
+过去分词”。
② 动词不定式具有名词、形容词和副词的特征,即可以在句子中作主语、宾语、定语、状语、表语和宾语补足语。
但不定式也保留动词的某些特征,即不定式后面可以跟宾语、表语和状语。动词不定式加上相关成分就构成不
定式短语。
③ 动词不定式可以放在谓语前句子作主语。但是通常将作主语的动词不定式或不定式短语放在谓语后面,而在主语
位置用“it”作形式主语(有时在不定式的前面还会用for sb.表示不定式的逻辑主语)。如：To help animals is
helping people. (帮助动物就是帮助人)/ It is very difficult (for us) to learn Chinese well.((对于我们而言)学好汉语
是非常的困难)/ It took me half an hour to work out this problem.(解出这道题花了我一个小时的时间)
④ 动词不定式可以作谓语动词(及物动词)的宾语。
[A] 及物动词+不定式一般形式：
谓语动词(vt.)
+不定式
(作宾语)
[说 明]
want(想) / try(试图) / decide(决定) / would
like(想要) / hope(希望) / love(喜爱) / learn(学
会) / afford(提供) / agree(同意) / fail(失败、未
能) / mean(意味着) / prefer(宁愿) / wish(希望) + to (do)
(无)
help(帮助)
to 可以省略
begin(开始)/ start(开始)/hate(憎恨)
也可跟动名词,意义变化不大
forget(忘记) / remember(记得)/ like(总爱)
也可跟动名词,意义变化较大
如：I would like to have a rest at the moment.(我现在想休息一下)/ They began to search the room for the thief.(他
们开始在屋子里搜寻小偷)/ He liked to have a swim in the pool near his house.(他喜爱在靠家的水塘里面游泳)/
When did you learn to speak English?(你什么时候开始学英语的？)/ Don’t forget to close the door when you
leave.(你离开时别忘了关门
[比较] He forgot to turn off the light.(他忘了关灯.) (没关)/ He forgot turning off the light.(他忘记关过灯.)(关了) /
Please remember to ring me up.(记得给我打电话.)(还没打电话) / I remember calling you yesterday but you
forgot.(我记得昨天给你打电话了,但是你忘记了.)(打过电话)
[B] 及物动词+疑问词+不定式：
谓语动词(vt.)
+wh-疑问词+不定式 (作宾语)
[说明]
tell (告诉) / show (显示) / know (知道) /
ask (问) / find out (发现) / understand
(明白) / wonder(疑惑) / learn(学会) /
what
where
+ how + to (do)
who
不定式疑问
形式还可以
作句子的主
93
forget(忘记) / remember(记得) / teach
sb.(教某人) / discuss(商讨)
which
……
语、表语等。
如：He does not know which one to take.(他不知道该选哪个)/ Tell me how to get to the station.(告诉我怎么样去
火车站)/ She asked me what to do for today’s homework.(她问我今天家庭作业做什么)/ Can you teach me how
to search the internet?(你能教我怎样上网吗？)
[C] 不定式作宾语而后面又有宾语补足语时,通常用it 代替作形式宾语,而不定式则后置。如： I found it not very
easy to learn to ride a bike.(我发现学骑车不很容易)
⑤ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作定语,放在名词或代词后面。
[A] 记住下面的一些结构：
被修饰部分 + 不定式(作后置定语)
汉 语 意 思
a key
to lock the door
锁门的钥匙
a box
to hold these things
装这些东西的箱子
give her a book
to read
给她一本书读
Is there any (+名词/代词)
to (do)?
有…要(做的)吗?
It’s time
to go.
是走的时间了。/ 该走了。
Do you have any work
to do?
你有工作要做吗?
I’d like something
to eat.
我要点儿吃的。
I have nothing
to say.
我没有话要说。
Would you like something
to drink?
你要点儿喝的吗？
[B] 在这种情况下,如果不定式动词是不及物动词,则后面必须加介词。如：
They could not find a place to live in.(他们找不到住的地方)/ Please give me a chair to sit on.(请给我一张椅子
坐坐)/ He has got a writing brush to write with.((他找到了写字的毛笔)
⑥ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作状语,有下列几种情况：
[A] 放在不及物动词(come, go, stop, finish, wait 等词)的后面。如：He came to see her yesterday.(他昨天来看望
她)(表示来的目的)/ I stopped to have a rest.(我停下来休息一会儿)(表示停下来的目的)
[B] 放在完整的谓语之后(即“谓语+宾语”、“谓语+宾语+补语”、“动词+表语”之后)。如：We cleaned the room
to let him play in it. (我们打扫了房间以便让他在里面玩)/ I opened the window to see more clearly.(我打开窗
子以便看得更清楚点儿)
[C] 有时表示目的的不定式短语可以放在句首。如：To arrive there on time,I got up one hour earlier than
usual.(为了按时到达,我们比平时早起了一个小时)(表示早起的目的)
[注意] stop to do 与stop doing 的不同。如：They stopped to have a look.(他们停下来看看)(不定式作“停下来”
的目的状语)/ They stopped looking out of the window and began to listen to the teahcher.(他们停止向窗外
望,开始听老师讲课)(动名词作宾语,表示“停止”的内容)
⑦ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作表语,限用于连系动词之后。如：My job is to keep the goal.(我的工作就是守住球
门)
⑧ 动词不定式可以在句子中用作复合宾语中的宾语补足语。
谓 语 动 词(vt.)
+ 宾语
(人 / 物)
+不定式
(作宾语补足语)
ask(请) / tell(关照) / teach(教) / want(想要) /
would like(想要) / get(让) / help(帮) /
invite(邀请) / like(喜欢) / warn(警告) /
+sb. / sth.
+to (do)
make(使得) / let(让) / hear(听) / see(看) /
feel(感觉) / watch(观看)/ have(使得) /
help(帮助)
+sb. / sth.
+ (do)
如：Mum asked me to help her with the cooking.(妈妈叫我帮助她做饭)/ I would like you to see my parents.(我想
要你见见我的父母)/ The boss often made the workers work 14 hours a day.(老板常让工人们一天工作14 小
时)/ Now let me hear you play the violin.(现在让我来听你拉小提琴)
[注意] help 之后做宾补的不定式符号to 可以省略；hear / see / feel / watch 之后的宾补用不定式与现在分词时,
含义不同,需特别注意,(参见现在分词部分)。试比较：
I heard her crying when I walked past.(我路过时听到她正在哭)(指当时瞬间的情况)
94
I sat near her and heard her sing the new song.(我坐在她附近听她唱新歌)(指整个过程)
(3)动名词
① 动名词由动词原形加词尾“ing”构成。动名词有动词的特征,可以跟宾语,可以被状语修饰；它也有名词的特
征,在句子中可以作主语、宾语(包括介词宾语)等。动名词加相关词语(宾语或状语等)构成动名词短语。
② 动名词可以作主语。一般可用it 作形式主语而将动名词短语后移。如：Learning English all by yourself is not
so easy.(自学好英语不那么容易)(=It is not so easy learning English all by yourself.)
③ 动名词可以作宾语。
[A] want / need 之后用动名词时,含有被动意思。如：Your car needs reparing badly.(你的车急需修理。)(被修)My
hair needs cutting.(我要理发。)(头发被理)
[B] remember / forge / stop / finish 之后用动名词时,与用不定式含义不同。如：I forgot to write a letter to him.(我
忘了给他写封信)(根本没写) / I forgot writing a letter to him.(我忘了给他写过信)(写了却忘了) / They
stopped to look back.(他们停下来向后看)(停下的目的是向后看) / They stopped looking back.(他们停止向后
看)(不向后看了)
[C] enjoy / mind / keep / hate/ go 等词一般用动名词作宾语。如：Do you mind my closing the door?(把门关上你
介意吗？)/ She hates travelling by air.(她讨厌坐飞机旅行)/ They went swimming every afternoon.(他们每天
下午去游泳)/ I enjoy walking around the town.(我喜欢在镇上转悠)
[D] like / love / start / begin / learn 后面用动名词时,与用不定式意思相近或相同。如：We began to study English
when we were at primary school.(我们在小学时就开始学英语了) / We began studying English when we were
at primary school. (我们在小学时就开始学英语了)
④ 动名词可以作表语,此时特别注意不要与现在进行时混淆。如：My job is putting these parts together.(我的事
情是把这些部件拼起来) / I am putting these parts together.(我正在把这些部件拼起来)
⑤ 动名词与现在分词构成相同,但是含义不同,动名词主要表示事情,而现在分词则主要表示进行着的动作。如：
Eating too much is not good for your health. (动名词短语,作主语) / Seeing is believing.(动名词短语,分别作主
语和表语) / He ran after a moving bus and got onto it.(现在分词,作定语) / His father saw him sitting on some
eggs.(现在分词,作宾补)
(4)分词： 包含现在分词和过去分词。(高中学习重点)
① 主要区别：现在分词一般有主动的意思或表示动作正在进行的意思；过去分词有被动或动 作已经完成的意
思。分词可以有自己的宾语或状语。
② 分词或分词短语在句子中作定语、状语和复合宾语等。
[A] 作定语：分词作定语时,一般要放在修饰的名词之前,分词短语作定语时,则要放在所修饰的名词之后。 如：
I have got a running nose.(我流鼻涕) / The woman running after the thief shouted very loudly,“Stop the
thief!”(跟着小偷追的妇女大喊：捉小偷！) / Yesterday I met a man called Mr. Black.(昨天我遇见了一个名
叫布莱克先生的人)/ He only gave me a broken glass,so I was very angry with him.(他只给了我一个坏玻璃
杯,所以我很生他的气)
[B] 现在分词可以作下列动词的宾语补足语。(参考不定式作宾语补足语)
谓语动词(vt.)
宾语
宾语补足语
keep(保持) / see(看到) /
hear(听到) / watch(注意到) /
feel(感觉到)
sb./sth.
(do)ing
如：Mum kept me working all the week.(妈妈让我一个星期都在工作)/ When I entered the room,I saw Jack
eating a big pear.(我进入房间时看到杰克正在吃一只大梨子)/ In the dark I felt something very cold moving
on my foot.(黑暗之中我感到有个冷的东西在我的脚上移动)
[C] 现在分词可以作状语,表示伴随情况。如：She came into the classroom,holding a pile of papers in her
hand.(他走进教室,手上抓着一沓纸)/ I am very busy these days getting ready for the coming oral test.(这些日
子我正忙着准备即将来到的口语考试)
[D] 过去分词可以作表语,放在连系动词后面,但要注意不要与被动语态混淆,“主系表”主要表示状态,而被动
语态则表示动作。常用过去分词作表语的结构有：be worried (焦虑) / be pleased (高兴) / be tired (疲劳) / get
dressed (打扮好) / get lost (迷路) / get caught (遭遇) / beome frustrated (沮丧) / become intereted in (对…感
兴趣)等等。例略。
[E] 过去分词可以作宾语补足语。如：I had my hair cut this morning.(今天早上我让人给我理了发)(注意：have
sth. done 表示动作由别人来做,而have done sth.则为现在完成时的结构,两个结构不可以混淆)
95
8、动词用法辨析：
(1)“Why not+动词原形+…?”(干嘛不……?)是简略句,完全形式是：Why don’t you +动词原形+…?如：Why not go and
have a look?(干嘛不去看看？)/ Why not try it once again?(为什么不再试试？)
(2) seem(好象)的用法：记住几个结构：①sb./sth. + seem + (to be+)形容词+…；②sb./sth. + seem + like +…；③sb/sth
+ seem + to (do)；④It seems that + 从句。如：He seemed (to be) very happy when he was called by the headmaster.
(被校长叫到名字时他好象很开心) / It seems that nobody else could do such a foolish thing except Jim
. (除了吉姆
好象没有什么人会做出如此愚蠢的事情来)
(3) be afraid(害怕)的用法：记住几个结构：①be afraid of sth; be afraid of (doing); ②be afraid to (do); ③be afraid
that+从句。如：She is a little afraid of snakes.(她有点怕蛇)/ Don’t be so afraid to stay at home alone at night.(别
害怕晚上一个人在家)/ I’m afraid that somebody will take his place because of his serious mistakes.(恐怕有人要取
代他了,因为他犯了那么大的错误)
(4) be sorry(抱歉)的用法：记住几个结构：①be sorry for (sth); ②be sorry for (doing sth); ③be sorry to (do); ④be
sorry that+从句。如：I am very sorry for keeping you waiting so long. (不好意思让你久等了)I am sorry to trouble
you.(对不起,麻烦你了)/ I am sorry (that) he isn’t here at the moment.(恐怕他现在不在)
(5) be sure (确信)的用法：记住几个结构： ①be sure of (sth); ②be sure to(do); ③be sure that+从句。如：She told me
many times that she was sure to come.(她给我讲过多次她一定会来的) / Are you sure of your answer?Maybe it’s
wrong.(你对你的答案有把握吗？也许是错的。)/ I am sure that Dad will help me with the job.(我确信爸爸会帮着
我做这件事情的)
(6) make 与do 的用法：一般情况下表示进行活动或者做工作用do,表示创造建构某事物用make. 如：I don’t know
what to do.(我不知道该干什么)/ I’m not going to do any work.(我不准备做什么)/ My father and I once made a
boat.(我和我爸曾经做过一只船)
此外还要记住一些固定说法：do good / harm / business / one’s best / a favour……
make a decision / an effort / a mistake / a noise / a phone call / money / war / the bed / sure,...
(7)put on、wear、have…on、be in、try on、dress 的用法：put on 强调“穿、戴”这个动作过程,wear 则表示“穿着、
戴着”这一状态,have+衣物+on 主要表示状态,be in(+颜色/衣物)也是表示一个状况,dress(+人)表示“给…人穿
衣”。如：Please put on your new shoes.(请穿上你的新鞋)/ The twins are wearing the same clothes.(双胞胎穿着相
同的衣服)/ Today she has an overcoat on.(今天她穿着一件大衣) / Do you know the woman who is in black?(你认
识那个身穿黑衣的女人吗？)/ Dad is dressing Tom now.(爹正在给汤姆穿衣)
[注意]dress 与wear 或put on 的区别：wear 或put on 常用衣物作宾语,而dress 常用人作宾语。表示给自己穿衣时
常用“get dressed”或“dress oneself”表达。be dressed in 与wear 基本同义。dress up 意为“穿上盛装、乔装
打扮”。如：Could you dress the baby for me?(你能替我给宝宝穿衣吗？)/ He is eight but can’t dress himself.(他八
岁了,还不会穿衣服)/ She was dressed in a red coat.(她穿着一件红上衣)/ Do I have to dress up to go to Jim’s
party?(我得穿上好衣服去参加吉姆的聚会吗？)
(8)like、love 与enjoy 的用法：三个词都含有“喜欢”的意思,但是,like 和enjoy 后面跟动名词,love 后面一般跟动词
不定式love to do sth.。like 后面有时跟动词不定式,表示一种习惯或嗜好(往往与具体的时间或地点有关)。enjoy
后面还可以加名词、反身代词,表示“享受…乐趣；玩得开心”。如：Do you like shopping?(你喜欢购物吗？)/ He
likes to have a swim when he gets home every afternoon（习惯，与具体的时间有关）.(每天下午放学后他总爱游
个泳)/ They love to sing foreign songs.(他们喜爱唱外国歌曲)/ Did you enjoy yourself at the party?(在聚会上你玩
得开心吗？)/ He enjoys living in China.(他喜欢在中国生活)
(9)study、learn 的用法： study 主要表示“学习、研究”,指过程；而learn 主要表示“学会”,指结果。表示“学”
时可以互换。如：How many subjects do you study?(你学多少门课程？) / Have you learned it yet?(这个你学过了
吗？)/ How long have you studied/learned English?(你学英语多久了？)
learn 还可以表示“听说”,如：He learned the musician himself was in town.(他听说音乐家本人就在城里)
(10)think、want、would like 的用法：三个词都含有“想”的意思,但think 指“思考、考虑”,want 指“想要、愿望、
企图”,would like 指“想要”,think 后面一般跟介词短语或从句,want 和would like 后面跟名词或动词不定式。
如：Do you think that China will become a developed country in 40 years? (你认为中国会在40 年后成为发达国家
吗？)/ I am thinking of the money I once lent to Li Min.((我正在想着以前借给黎敏的钱)/ What do you really
want to say?(你到底想干什么？)/ Which of these cakes would you like (to have)?(这些饼子中你想吃哪些？)
(11)look for、search…for、find、find out 的用法：前面两个词语表示动作过程,后面两个表示结果,look for 指“寻找”
不见的或丢失的东西,但还没有找到；search…for…指“为找…而搜寻…”；find 指“找到”了东西；find out
主要指“查明一个事实真相”。如：Hey, Monkey, what are you looking for in the cupboard?(嘿,猴儿！你在厨子
96
里面找什么呢？)/ Have you found the lost key to your car?(你找着丢失的车钥匙了吗？)/ The soldiers were
searching the room for the spy when they heard a loud noise.(士兵们正在房间里面搜寻间谍突然间他们听到了衣
声巨响)/ Let’s try to find out who broke the window.(让我们查查谁把窗子打破了)
[注解] find 的几个结构：find sb. sth“为某人找到…”,find sth./sb. + adj./n.“发觉某人是…”,find it +adj. + to do…(或
+宾语从句)“发现(做……)如何”。如： His mother found her daughter a very clever girl.(他的母亲发现她的女
儿是个聪明的女孩)(名词作补语补足语) / You can easily find it not good for your health to eat cold food.(你很容
易就会发现吃冷食对你的身体是不利的)
(12)listen to、hear 的用法：两个词与听觉有关,listen to 指“听”这一过程,hear 指“听到”这一结果。如：Are you listening
to me, Jim? Yes, I have heard your words. (吉姆,你在听我说吗？是的,你的话我全听见了)
(13)look、see、watch、read 的用法：四个词均与眼睛有关,look 指放眼去“看”(不管是否看得到),指“看”的过程；
see 指“看见”这一结果,有时see 还引申为“明白”,表示“看”时后面加“电影”等词，see the film/film ；watch
指专注的看,含有“注视、监视”之义,后面常跟“电视、比赛”等词；read 限制为看书面材料,译为“看、阅读”,
后面跟“书、报纸、杂志”等词。如：What are you looking at?(你在看什么？)/ Please look at the blackboard. (请
看黑板)/ Let me go to see the film, mum, will you? (妈妈,让我去看电影吧,好吗？)/ He won’t feel well until he
finishes watching the football match. (要看完了足球赛他才会感觉好些)/ Reading gives us knowledge.(阅读给我
们知识)
(14)hear、hear of、hear from、learn 的用法： hear“听说”,后面可以跟名词、代词、从句表示听见的内容,hear of
“听说”,后面跟人,指对某人有耳闻但没有见过面；hear from“收到……的来信”,后面加人；learn“听说、得
知”,后面跟从句,含义与hear 相似。如：I hear Mr Green is coming to see us tonight. (我听说格林先生今晚要来
看望我们)/ Have you ever heard of the man who once went to the Himalaya Mountains? (你是否听说过那个去过
喜马拉雅山的人？)/ How often do you hear from your father? (隔多久你收到你父亲的信？)/ He learned the
musician himself was in town.(他听说音乐家本人就在城里)
(15)speak、talk、say、tell 的用法：四个词与“说”有关。speak“讲话、发言、演说”,是不及物动词,涉及人时要
加介词to,speak 作及物动词时后面跟语言名称；talk“谈话、闲谈”,是不及物动词,涉及人时用介词with、to 等,
涉及事情时后面跟介词about 等；say 是及物动词,后面跟名词、代词、从句等,表示说的内容；tell 是及物动词,
后面首先要跟人,然后再跟从句或者介词短语等。如：Do you speak English? (你讲英语吗？)/ Who spoke at the
meeting? (谁在会上发了言？)/ Our teacher is talking to Lin Tao’s parent. (我们的老师正在跟林涛的家长讲话)/
Can you say it in English? (你能用英语说出它吗？)/ Please tell me something about the strange flying object. (请
跟我讲讲那个奇怪的飞行物的事情吧)
(16)be able to(do)、can 的用法：can 是情态动词,有许多含义,表示“可能、可以、会”等意思,只有①现在式can 和
过去式could 两种形式；be able to 表示能力上“会”,有多种时态形式,to 后面跟动词原形,有时可以与can/could
互换。如：Can you speak English? (你会说英语吗？)/ He couldn’t(wasn’t able to) swim when he was 12. (他十二
岁时不会游泳)
表示成功的做了某事时，只能用be able to.如：
He was able to flee Europe before the war broke out.
(17)there be、have 的用法：两个词都可以译为“有”,但是,have 表示的是“拥有”,主语必须是人或者物；there be
表示“存在”的概念,主语在there be 之后。如：How many brothers and sisters do you have? I have only one
brother. (你有多少兄弟？我只有一个兄弟。)/ How many chairs and desks are there in their classroom? There is
none. (他们教室里有多少张桌椅？一张也没有。)
[注解]there be sb./sth doing 与there be sb./sth to do 有所不同：用doing 表示一个正在发生的事情,而用to do 则
表示尚未做的即将要做的动作。如： Look! There is a dog lying on the stairway. / Take your time. There is nothing
for you to do tonight.
(18)borrow、lend、keep 的用法：表示“借”的三个词,borrow“借进”、lend“借出”都是一次性动作,不可以和表
示一段的时间状语连用；keep“保存”用来表示借一段时间。如： I have lost the book I borrowed from my teacher.
What can I do? (我丢掉了从老师那里借来的书)/ How long have you kept my dictionary,eh?For more than two
months! (呃,我的字典你借了多久了？两个多月了！)
(19)bring、take、carry、send、lift 的用法：bring 指从远处“拿来”，是从别处把东西带到这里来,如：Can you bring
me that glass? 你能给我拿那个杯子吗？；take 指从面前“拿走”，把人或物拿到别处，不是说话的地方，如：
Please take the letter to the post office .；carry 指一般的搬运, 不涉及方向；send 主要指“送、派遣、寄”；lift 指
把东西由低向高“提起、拎起”。例略。
(20)hope、wish 的用法：两个词都表示“希望”,但是,hope 表达有把握或信心实现的事情,后面直接跟动词不定式或
者宾语从句,不可以跟动名词或作宾语补足语的不定式；wish 表达实现的可能性不大的事情,后面跟名词、宾语从
句(用过去时)或者作宾语补足语的不定式。如：We all hope to see him very soon. (我们全都希望尽快见到他)/ I
97
hope it will be fine tomorrow so that we can go out. (我希望明天天好,这样我们就能出去了。)/ How I wish it was not
raining at the moment!(我多么希望此刻不在下雨！)(事实上天正在下雨，虚拟语气)
(21)take、spend、pay、cost 的用法：①看主语 ②看结构
spend 的宾语通常是金钱或时间,句型：sb.+(spend)+时间/金钱+on sth / (in) doing sth. ；
take 的主语通常是事情,句型：sth./It + (take)+sb.+时间+to do… 。(如果是动作则常用it 作形式主语将动词不定
式后移)；
cost 的宾语通常是时间、金钱、力气,句型：sth. +(cost)+sb.+时间/金钱/力气. ；
pay 的宾语通常是金钱,句型：sb.+(pay)+金钱+for+事物.
如：She spent the whole night reading the novel. (她花了一个晚上看那本小说)/ This job will take me two days.=It
will take me two days to do the job. (做这件事情要花我两天的时间)/ How much does a house like this cost? (像这样
的房子要花多少钱？)/ I paid him twenty dollars for the book.. (我花了20 元从他那儿买了书)
(22)begin、start 的用法：begin 在大多数情况下可以替代start,(反义词是end),后面接不定式或动名词时区别不大,但
是start 还可以表示“开始、出发、启动”,反义词是stop；某事停止后再重新开始一般用start.如：When did you
begin/start to learn English? (你什么时候开始学英语的？)/ They started getting in the crops after the rain stopped.
(雨停后他们开始收割庄稼) / This time he could not start his car. (这次他没法启动他的汽车)
(23)arrive in/at、reach、get to 的用法：arrive 是不及物动词,到达具体地点(单位，学校，家，车站)时后面加介词at ,
The new teacher arrived at our school . We arrived at the station just now,到达一个大的地方(国家、地区、城市)时后
面加介词in，如：We arrived in Paris yesterday, arrive 后面可以直接跟地点副词here/there/home 等；get 表示“到
达”时是不及物动词,涉及地点(无论大小)时后面加to,get 后面可以直接跟地点副词here 等；reach 是及物动词,
后面直接跟地点名词。如：He arrived in San Francisco last Sunday. (上个星期天他抵达旧金山)/ How did you get
there in the night? (你是怎样在夜间到达那里的？)/ We hurried all the way and reached the station just five minutes
before the train left. (我们一路狂奔在火车启动前5 分钟到达车站)
(24)be made of、be made from、be made into、be made in、be made by、be made for 的区别：be made of 指从制成品
中可以看得出原材料,而be made from 则指从制成品中看不出原材料,口语中都可以换成be made out of。 be made
into 表示“被制成……”,be made in 表达被制造的地点,be made by 表达制造的人,be made for 表达被制造的目的。
如：This kind of paper is made from bamboo. (这种纸是由竹子生产的)/ The desk is made of wood and metal. (桌子
是铁和木头打的)/ A lot of paper has been made into paper birds. (许多纸被折叠成了小鸟)/ Computers are made in
these cities. (计算机是在这几个城市制造的)/ This kite was made by Uncle Wang. (这个风筝是王叔叔做的)/ A big
bag was made for me to hold my waste things.(一只大包做好了让我装废物)
(25)be used for、be used to、used to、get used to 的区别：be used for + 名词/代词或动名词, be used to + 动词原形,
表示两个短语意思相近,表示“用于…”。 used to + 动词原形,表示“过去常常”,否定式可以是“didn’t use to”
也可以是“usedn’t to”；get/be used to + 动名词,表示“习惯于….”。如：A knife can be used for cutting things.(刀
可以用来割东西)/ A knife can be used to cut things.(刀可以用来割东西)/ He used to borrow novels from the library
when he was at school. (他上学时常常在图书馆借书)/ He is used to getting up early in the morning. (他习惯早
起)(注意：be used to 表示“被用作”和“习惯于”的区别)
(26)beat,win 与lose： beat (打败),后面跟“人”,而win(赢得),后面跟“比赛、竞赛”等。如：Who won at last? (最
后谁赢了？)/ Class Three beat us 5-0. (三班以5∶0 打败了我们)/ I am sure to win the match. (我一定能赢得比赛)
而lose 则表示“输了”,常用句型：lose sth. to sb. 如：Unluckily we lost the match to Class Three. (不幸的是我们
比赛输给了三班)
(27)grow、plant、keep 的区别：plant 着重讲“栽、种植”这个动作,grow 则指种植以后的“栽培”、“管理”,而keep
则主要指“喂养”、“赡养”一个人或者动物。如 ：He grew vegetables in his garden. (他在园子里种菜)/ I planted
ten trees last year,but four of them died. (去年我栽了10 棵树,但是死了4 棵)/ Old women enjoy keeping cats or dogs
to kill the time. (老年的妇女喜欢养猫养狗打发时间)
(28)fall 、drop 的区别：fall 指东西由高处向下坠落,不及物动词；也可以作连系动词,意思是“变得,进入某种状态”。
drop 表示物体由高处往低处落下,不及物动词；或让物体落向低处,及物动词。如：The man fell off the tractor and
hurt himself. (那个人从拖拉机上摔下来跌伤了)/ Soon after they touched the pillows they fell (系动词) fast asleep.
(他们头挨枕头不久就睡着了)/ He felt as if he had to drop maths .(他觉得似乎要放弃数学)/ He dropped a letter into
the mail-box.(他向邮箱里丢了一封信)
(29)join、join in、take part in 的区别：join 多指参加组织、团体、党派等,后面跟人时表示和某人一起参加某项活
动；join in 指参加某项游戏或活动；take part in 多指参加群众性的活动、运动、会议等。如：He joined the army
98
in 2001.(他2001 年参军)/ They joined me in congratulating you.(他们和我一起向你祝贺)/ Do join us in the
game.(千万参加我们的比赛) / He took an active part in the students’ movement in the 1940s.(在二十世纪40 年代他
积极参加学生运动)
(30)beat、hit、strike 的用法区别：beat 指“连续不断地打击；(心脏的)跳动”；hit 指“一次性地撞击、命中”；strike
与hit 基本同义,还可以理解为“划(火柴)、给……深刻的印象”。如：The man looks dead, but his heart is still beating
weakly. (那个人看上去死了可心脏还在微弱地跳动) / He hit the ball so hard that it flew over their heads and fell
into the lake. (他踢球的劲太大球飞过他们的头顶落入水中) / He went into the room and struck a match(火柴). (他
走进房间划着了一根火柴)
(31)carry on、carry out 的区别：carry on 表示“进行、继续”；carry out 表示“执行、贯彻”。如：I will carry on the
work. (我会继续工作)/ I have some difficulties in carrying out his orders. (对于执行他的命令我有问题)
(32)be amazed 与be surprised 的区别：be amazed“感到惊讶”,指人对某个不可能（可能是自认为的）发生却实际
发生了的事情感到极其的讶异；be surprised“感到吃惊”指人对突发的事件感到惊讶。如：When he dived deep into
the sea, he was amazed at the colours of all the beautiful coral reefs. (他深潜到海中时被所有美丽的珊瑚礁惊呆了)
（原先可能想不到世上会有这么美的珊瑚） / He was very surprised when he heard a loud noise from inside the
room. (听到房间里传出一个很大的声音他非常地吃惊)（突然传出来的声响）
(33)warn 的用法：“warn sb. of/about sth”意思是“针对…而警告某人”；“warn sb (not) to do sth”意思是“告戒某
人(不)要做某事”；“warn sb. + that 从句”意思是“警告某人说……”。如：They warned the passengers of thieves.
(他警告路人小心窃贼) / I warn you that you will fail in the coming exams if you are still so lazy. (我警告你：如果你
还这么懒在即将来到的考试中你会不及格的。) / He was warned not to go out in the late night. (他受到警告不要在
深夜出去)
(34)think of 与think about 等短语的区别：think of 表示“考虑、思念、认为、想起、建议”等；“think about”表
示“看待、认为”，表示对某事的看法；“think much /highly /a lot of”表示“高度评价…”；“think over”表示“仔
细考虑”；“think out”表示“想出”。如：The headmaster thought highly of this boy. (校长高度地评价了这个男孩)
/ We’re thinking of going to France for our holiday. (我们在考虑去法国度假的事情) / Think it over and you will
have a way. (仔细考虑就有办法) / I cannot think of his name. I forgot it. (我想不起他的名字我忘了) / －What do
you think about his composition? －Very good! (他的作文你觉得怎么样？ 很好。)
(35)agree with/ agree to / agree on 等词语用法：“agree to+动词”表示“同意做某事”,“agree with + sb./观点”表示
“赞同…的观点”/ agree about 表示“对…话题有相同看法”/“agree to +建议”表示“同意”某人的建议，agree
to your advice,“agree on + 决定”表示“赞成某人的决定”, agree on your decision。例略。
(36)deserve(应该,应得)的用法：deserve 后面可以加不定式,也可以加名词或动名词。如：They had tried their best and
they deserved to win. (他们尽力了该赢。) / The little boy always made troubles around and deserved beating. (小男孩
总是处处惹麻烦活该被打) / The girl did a good deed and deserved praise. (女孩做了好事应该受到表扬)
九、连接词
1、连词的含义：连接 词与词、短语与短语、或引导从句的词叫连接词。
2、连词的分类：连词分为并列连接词和从属连接词两种。
1、并列连接词连接并列的词、短语、从句或句子。常见的并列连接词有：and(和),but(但是),or(或者,否则),nor(也
不), so(所以), however(然而,无论如何),for(因为),still(可是),as well as(也),both..and...(...和...), not only ...but
also...(不但…而且…), either… or…(或…或…),neither… nor…(既不…也不…)等。
2、从属连接词用于引导从句,常见的从属连接词有：
when( 当… 时候), while( 正当… 时候), after( 在… 之后), before( 在… 之前), since( 自从), until( 直到),
although/though(虽然), if(假如), as(如…一样；由于), as …as…(和…一样), as far as(就…而言), as long as(只要),
as soon as(一…就…), even if(即使), because(因为), unless (除非), than(比…), whether (是否…), in order that…(为
了), so…that…(如此…以致), so that…(以便), now that…(现在既然), by the time…(到…时候), every time…(每当),
as if…(仿佛),no matter when(或whenever)(无论何时),no matter where(或wherever)(无论在哪里)等。
［辨析］
(1) because、as、since、for 的用法：because(因为)表示原因的语气最强,常表示必然的因果关系,从句一般放在主句
后面；另外,回答why 的问句只能用because. as(因为)表示一般的因果关系,语气比because 弱,说明比较明显的
原因,它引导的从句可以放在句首也可以放在句尾。since(既然)表示对方已经知道、无需加以说明的原因或事实。
for(因为)是并列连词,语气较弱,用来补充说明理由或提供一种解释。如：He is not at school today because he is
seriously ill.（他今天没有上学因为他病得厉害）/ As all of you have got here, now, let’s go to the zoo.（既然大伙儿
99
都到了我们就去动物园吧）/ I will ask Lin Tao to go with me since you are very busy.（既然你很忙我就叫林涛和我
一起去吧）/ We must be off now for the match starts at 7：00.（我们得走了因为比赛在七点开始）
(2)if、whether 的区别：表示“是否”时,if 和whether 同义,引导宾语从句,另外,whether 还可以引导主语从句、表语
从句(以及同位语从句)等名词性从句或者让步状语从句；而if 还可以表示“如果”,引导条件状语从句, (主句与
从句遵循主将从现的原则)。如：I don’t know if/whether he will arrive on time.（我不知道他是不是会按时到达）
/ I will ring you up if he arrives on time.（如果他按时到达我会给你打电话的）
[注意]下列情况只能用whether 不能用if：①引导主语从句,②引导表语从句,③引导从句作介词宾语,④引导不定
式短语,⑤引导让步状语从句,⑥在动词discuss 之后,⑦在wonder / not sure 之后,⑧在if 与whether 含义易混时。
如：Whether it is a fine day next Sunday is still a question.（下个星期天是不是个好天还是个问题）(引导主语从句)
/ Please ask him whether to go there with a raincoat or not.（请问一下带不带雨衣去那儿）(作动词的宾语) / Hainan
is the place to be, whether it’s summer or winter.（海南是个该去的地方无论冬夏）(引导让步状语从句)/ Please let
me know whether you need my help.（请告诉我你是否需要我的帮助）(引导宾语从句)(如果换成if 则还可能表示
“如果你需要我的帮助请告知”)
(3)while、when、as 的用法区别：while 常表示一个较长的动作,它引导的从句动作与主句的动作是只能是同时发生
的、是平行的；when 可以表示较短的动作也可以表示较长的动作,主句和从句的动作可以同时发生也可以先后发
生；as 与上两词同义,可替换while 和when, 表示主句和从句的动作同时发生,常译为“一边……一边……”。如：
Please do not trouble me while I am writing my homework.（我写作业时请不要打扰我）/ I’ll go home when I have
finished my job.（我干完了活儿就回去）(不是同时发生)/ They were running quickly across the road when they
heard the sound of a truck coming.（他们正快速地穿过马路忽然听到了卡车开来的声音）/ As we walked in the
dark street, we sang songs and talked loudly.（当我们在黑洞洞的街上走路时我们高声地唱歌说话）
(4)till/until 与not…till/until 的区别：前者表示一个延续性的动作,后者表示一个才开始的动作。如：I will stay here and
watch the baby until you return.（我会呆在这里看着娃娃直到你回来）(stay 这个动作一直进行到你return) / They
won’t go on working until they get what they think is reasonable.（他们要到获得了他们认为合理的东西时才会继续
干下去的）
另外till 与until 基本可以互换,但是在句首时只能用until,不能用till. 如：Until the last minute of the match we kept
playing.（我们坚持到比赛的最后一分钟）/ Not until he had finished his work did he go home.（直到做完工作他才
回家）（倒装句）
(5)though与although的区别：两个词都表示“虽然”,均不可以与but同时使用,但在句中可加still或yet连用。although
“尽管、虽然”仅作连词,比较正式,一般可以换为though； though“虽然、尽管、即使”,①还可以与even 连用
(=even if),表示“即使、纵然”,②作副词时意思是“然而、不过”,不能放在句首。③although 不能放在句末，though
则可以，用“，”隔开。如：He passed the exams although illness prevented him from going to classes. （尽管疾病
使他无法上课但是他还是通过了考试）/ she won’t leave the TV set,even though her husband is waiting for her for
the supper.（她不愿离开电视机虽然丈夫在等她吃饭）/ It was a quiet party. I had a good time, though.（这是个不
热闹的聚会尽管如此我还是玩得很开心）
(6)prefer to…rather than…与prefer…to…的区别：prefer to…rather than…后面都是用动词原形,prefer…to…都是用动
名词或名词。如：I prefer English to Japanese.（与日语相比我更喜欢英语）/ I prefer to learn English rather than learn
Japanese. （与日语相比我更喜欢学英语）
初一连词联系：
1.I had to go to work by taxi_______ I got up late this morning.
A. so B. but C. and D. because
用and, but, so 填空：
1. Jane didn’t work hard last term, _______ she failed many subjects.
2. I like playing badminton, _______ my sister doesn ’t.
3. David got up early this morning, _______ he got to school on time.
4. Lucy bought a book on animals, _______ she liked it very much.
十、简单句
1、简单句的特点：简单句通常只由一个主语(或并列主语)和一个谓语(或并列谓语)构成。
2、简单句的种类：简单句一般分为陈述句、疑问句、感叹句和祈使句四种。
3、陈述句：
用来说明一个事实的句子叫陈述句。它有肯定式和否定式两种形式。
▲陈述句的肯定式： He is a middle school student.（他是个中学生）/ I have a hammer in my hand.（我手上有把锤
100
子）/ She teaches us geography.（她教我们地理）/ The new play was good enough and everybody enjoyed it.（新的
话剧非常好大家都喜欢）
▲陈述句的否定式：
1)谓语动词如果是 be 、助动词、情态动词时,在它们的后面加“not”。如：My brother is not a teacher.（我的弟
弟不是教师）/ He does not have a cousin.（他没有堂兄弟）/ I will not go there tomorrow.（明天我不去那儿）/ My
mother is not cooking a meal in the kitchen.（我母亲现在不在厨房里做饭）/ You must not make such mistakes
again.（你不该再犯类似错误了） / We haven’t discussed the question yet（我们还没有讨论那个问题呢）.
2)谓语动词如果没有上述词语而是其他动词时,须在它的前面加do not(don’t).如： I don’t know anything about
it.(此事我一无所知) / Li Ming does not feed pigs in the countryside.（李明不在农村养猪）/ We didn’t expect to
meet her right here.（我们没指望着在这里见到她）/ We didn’t have a meeting yesterday afternoon.(昨天下午我
们没有开会)
3)如果“have”作“有”讲,也可以在它后面加not 构成否定式,其形式与have got 的否定式相同。 如：I haven’t (got)
any brothers or sisters.（我没有兄弟姐妹）
have 的否定形式：
① 当表示“有”的意思时，可以采用以下三种形式：have+not；do not+ have； have+ no+ n. 如：I have
not enough food to eat.= I do not have enough food to eat. =I have no enough food to eat.
② 当have 为助动词时，用“have+ not”结构。如：I have not been toShanghai。
③ 当have 既不表示“有”，也不作助动词用时，用“do not+ have”结构。I didn’t have breakfast
this morning.
具体到反义疑问句中，则遵循以下原则：
a.当have 表示“有”含义时，反意疑部问部分可以用have 形式，也可以用do 形式。例如：
He has a book in his hand, hasn't he?
He has a book in his hand, doesn't he?
b.当陈述部分的动词是have“有”的否定形式时，反意疑问部分是用have 形式还是用do 形式，取决于陈述部分
的动词形式。例如：
You haven't a car, have you?
You don't have any money with you, do you?
c.当have 不表示“有”含义而表示其他含义时，反意疑问句则必须用do 的形式。例如：
We had a good time in the vacation, didn't we?
He has his breakfast at seven everyday, doesn't he?
You have to get up early tomorrow, don't you?
[注意]
①句子中如果有all、both、very much/well 等词时,用not 一般构成部分否定,如果要完全否定,则通常使用none、
neither、not…at all 等；All of them went there.→None of them went there.（他们全都去了那里→他们全都没去
那里）
②句子中含有little、few、too(太)、hardly、never、neither、nor、seldom 等词时, 则视为否定句。如：Few people
live there because life there is very hard.（几乎没有人生活在那里因为那里的生活太艰难了）
③陈述句(主语+谓语+其他)在口语中可以直接表示疑问,表示惊讶或明知故问。如：That’s your boss?（那就是你
的老板？！）
④陈述句一般情况下应使用正常的语序, 即：主语+谓语+其他。但是有时会倒装,详见“倒装句”。
⑤所有的从句一律使用陈述句语序,即在连接词后采用“主语+谓语+其他”的顺序。如：The old man told me that
he would live here for ten more years before he returns home. （老人告诉我说他还要在这儿住几年然后回家）/
Could you tell me who you saw at the party last night?（能告诉我在聚会上你都看见了谁吗？）
4、疑问句：
▲一般疑问句：提问所述情况是否符合事实，要求用是还是不是，对还是错（用“yes”或“no”）来回答的疑问
句叫做一般疑问句。
1)一般疑问句构成：句中谓语动词是be、情态动词时,则将它们(提前)放到主语前面。（即把主语和be，情态动词
调换位置），即“be/情态动词+主语+----”如：Is he an engineer?（他是工程师吗？）/ Have you got today’s
newspaper? （你有今天的报纸吗？）（特殊情况）/ Shall we go to see a film this evening? （我们今晚去看电影
好吗？）/ Can you explain it ?（你能解释它吗？）/ Is there any fish for supper?（晚饭有鱼吗？）/ Would you like
to go out for a walk?（你想出去散步吗？）
谓语动词如果没有上述词语而是其他动词时, 则在主语前面加助动词do / does / did, 原来的谓语动词改为原
形，即“do+主语+动词原形”。如：Do you get up at six every morning?（你天天早晨六点起身吗？）/ Does she
101
study hard?（她学习努力吗？）/ Did you go there yesterday?（昨天你去那儿了吗？）
2)一般疑问句的回答：
一般疑问句通常用简略形式来回答。如：
Will you join us in playing basketball?（你加入我们打篮球好吗？）—Yes, we will.（是的我们会。）/ —No, we
won’t.（不我们不会。）
Have you got today’s newspaper?（你有今天的报纸吗？）—Yes, I have .（是的有。）/ —No, I haven’t.（不没有。）
回答时所用的时态应和问句里的时态一致。
[注意] 回答must 或者may 开头的疑问句要小心,参见情态动词有关内容。
3)一般疑问句的否定结构：be/助动词/情态动词+not+主语+---- 或：be/助动词/情态动词+主语+not+----如：
Will he not come?=Will not he come? （他难道不来吗？）/ Isn’t your sister a Party member?=Is your sister not a
Party member?（你的姐姐不是党员吗？）/ Don’t you like the play?=Do you not like the play?
否定疑问句并不单纯的表示提问，它常带有强烈的感情色彩，而且完全式比简略式所表达的语气更强烈：
①常带有惊异，责难或赞叹的语气，如：Haven’t you read the newspaper? 你没看过这份报纸？②有时暗示提
问者期待着肯定的回答，如：Shouldn’t we start now? 我们是不是该动身了？ Wasn’t it an interesting film? 那
部电影不是很有趣吗？ ③有时表示邀请或建议，如：Wouldn’t you go with me? 你不和我一起去吗？Won’t you
have a cup of coffee? 你不喝杯咖啡吗？
注意：这种否定结构的疑问句的回答与汉语的习惯不同。如果回答是肯定的,就用“yes+肯定结构”；如果回答
是否定的,就用“no+否定结构”。(情况与反意问句类似。)如：
Can’t he answer the question? (他不能回答这个问题吗？)
—Yes, he can.(不,他能回答这个问题。) —No,he can’t. (是的,他不能回答这个问题。)（不管怎么问，如果事
实上是“是的”，则用yes，如果事实上“不是，不能做某件事的”，则说“no”。
▲特殊疑问句：询问其语句中所缺失的部分，或者说，是要求得到暂时不知道的信息：什么，哪里，怎么样，多少，
等等。
特殊疑问句是提问实质内容的（要求得到有实质内容回答的，而不简单的回答是否）。特殊疑问词，就是用来代替
句子中缺失东西——你要询问的东西的。
What ＋ is it？
Who ＋ is your teacher?
从这里也看到了，不管从语法角度，还是实际理解角度，如果单是后面的一般疑问句，它是不完整的。
1)特殊疑问句结构是：疑问词+ 一般疑问句+-----？
疑问代词
+一般疑问句+？
除who 以外的疑问代词短语
疑问副词
如：What do you want?（你要什么？）/ Who(m) are you looking for ?（你在找谁？）/ Whose magazine is this?
（这是谁的杂志？）/Which class are you in?（你在哪班？）/ When did you get up this morning? （你今早什么
时候起身的？）/ Where have you been?（你到哪儿去了？）/ Why did he go to bed so early?（他为什么这么早
睡觉？）/ How did you go there?（你是怎么去的那儿？）
非重点，可以省略：但是,“who”引出的询问主语或主语部分相关词的特殊疑问句的结构与陈述句词序相同：
如：Who is dancing over there?（谁在那边跳舞？），Who dances best in your class? 班级里谁跳舞最好？
有时“what”,“which”,“whose”也可以引出与陈述句词序相同的特殊疑问句。如：What is on the wall?（什么
东西在墙上？/墙上有什么？）/ Which is yours?（哪个是你的？）/ Whose book is in your bag?（谁的书在你的
书包里？）（谓语动词是be 时）
[注意]从陈述句改为特殊问句时,先将剔除掉划线部分的句子改为一般问句,再将(划线)提问部分更改为疑问词
置于句首,特别要注意助动词的使用！如果只对主语或主语的修饰词提问,那么只需要将疑问部分改为疑问词即
可。
2)常用疑问代词和疑问副词：
疑问代词： who, whom, whose, which, what,
疑问副词： when, where, why, how,
how 构成的短语：how many (多少个) (独立用；或跟可数名词), how much (多少) (独立用；或跟不可数名词), how
old (多大年纪), how far (多远), how often (多常),how long (多久,多长), how soon (多久以后),how many times (多
少次),等等。
3)特殊疑问句有时也用否定式。如：Why don’t you ask Jim instead?(常缩略为Why not…?) (你为什么不转请Jim
102
呢？)
4) 特殊疑问句疑问部分有时可以有两个以上的疑问词。如：When and where were you born? (你是何时何地出生
的？)
5) 疑问词如果是介词的宾语, 则该介词可以在句首,也可以在句尾。如：What do you want a computer for? = For
what do you want a computer? (你干嘛要一台电脑呢？)
▲反意疑问句： 反意疑问句表示对陈述句所说的事实提出相反的疑问,要求对方用“yes”或“no”来进行回答。
1) 构成：陈述句+附加问句。由两部分组成：前一部分是陈述句,后一部分是疑问句,它是由be ,have, 助动词或情
态动词+主语构成。如陈述句是肯定结构,反意疑问句须用否定结构；反之,陈述句如是否定结构,反意疑
问句须用肯定结构。反意疑问句的两部分, 必须保持人称和时态的一致；反意疑问句的回答有时会和汉
语不同。
陈述句部分
附加问句部分
注 意 点
肯定陈述句
否定的简短一般问句
当陈述句部分含有“是”动词、(“有”动
词)、情态动词和助动词时,简短问句中沿用
该词；否则就使用do/does//did.
否定陈述句
肯定的简短一般问句
如：He is old, isn’t he? (他老了不是吗？) / The man went away, didn’t he? (那个男人走开了不是吗？) / He isn’t
old, is he? (他不老是吗？) / He never went there, did he? (他从没有去过那里是吗？)
2) 反意问句的回答：
无论哪种形式的反意问句,回答时要遵循：“Yes,+肯定式”或者“No,+否定式”
如：The man went away, didn’t he?(那人走开了,不是吗？)
——Yes, he did.(是的,他走了。)/ No, he didn’t.(不,他没有走。)
The man never went there, did he?(这人从来不去那里,是吗？)
——Yes, he did.(不是呀,他去的。)/ No, he didn’t.(是呀,他不去。)
特殊句型：
1.祈使句。祈使句后一般加上will you 或won’t you 构成反义疑问句，用will you 多表示“请求”，用won’t you 多表示
提醒对方注意。例如：
let 引导的祈使句有两种情况：①let’s---，后的反义疑问句用shall we 或shan’t we。如：Let’s go home, shan’t we? 回家
吧，好吗？②let us/me--- 后的反义疑问句用will you 或won’t you。如：let me have a try, won’t you?
其他祈使句都用will you 或won’t you 回答。
2.反意疑问句的陈述部分含有由un-, im-, in-, dis-, 等否定意义的前缀构成的词语时，陈述部分要视为肯定含义，
问句部分用否定形式。
①Your father is unhappy, isn’t he? （不能用is he?）
②The man is dishonest, isn’t he? （不能用is he?）
③It is impossible to learn English without remembering more words, isn’t it?（不能用is it ?）
3.反意疑问句的陈述部分带有little, few, never, hardly, seldom，not,no,nobody,nothing, none, neither 等
否定意义的词时，问句部分用肯定式。如：
①She never tells a lie, does she? （不用doesn’t she?）
②He was seldom late, was he?（不用wasn’t he?）
4.反意疑问句的陈述部分为I am……时，问句部分虽然也可用“am not I”，但习惯上用aren’t I？表示。如：I am
a very honest man, aren’t I?
5.反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We)第一人称 think(believe, suppose, consider) + that 从句时，问句部分的动词
及主语与that 从句内的动词和主语保持一致。如：①I think that he has done his best, hasn’t he?
②We think that English is very useful, isn’t it? （不用don’t we?）
6.反意疑问句的陈述部分为I(We) don’t think(believe, suppose, consider)+ that 从句时，从句为否定意义，
问句部分的动词和主语仍与that 从句保持一致且用肯定式。如：①I don’t think that you can do it, can you?
（不用do I?）
②We don’t believe that the news is true, is it? （不用do we?）
7.反意疑问句的陈述部分为非第一人称主语+ think(believe, suppose, consider) + that 从句时，问句部分的动词
和主语与陈述部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：
①They all think that English is very important, don’t they? （不用isn’t it?）
②He didn’t think that the news was true, did he? （不用wasn’t/ was it?）
8.反意疑问句的陈述部分为主语+said( told, reported, asked……) + that 从句时，问句部分的动词和主语与陈述
部分的主句动词和主语保持一致。如：①They said that you had finished your work, didn’t they? （不用hadn’t
103
you）
②Kate told you that she would go there, didn’t she? （不用wouldn’t she?）
9.陈述部分的主语为不定代词something, anything, nothing, everything 时，问句部分的主语用it。如：
①Something is wrong with the computer, isn’t it?
②Nothing has happened to them, has it?
10.陈述部分的主语为不定代词somebody(someone), anybody(anyone), nobody(no one), everybody(everyone)，no,
none, neither时，问句部分的主语用he 或 they(通常用they)，这时问句动词的数应和he或 they一致。如：①Someone
has taken the seat, hasn’t he?
②Everyone has done his best in the game, haven’t they?
11.陈述部分为Let me……时，问句部分习惯上用shall I? 或will you?形式。如：Let me have a try, shall I?(will
you?)
12.陈述部分为Let us……时，问句部分习惯上用will you?形式。如：Let us stop to rest, will you?
13.陈述部分为Let’s……时，问句部分习惯上用shall we?形式。如：Let’s go home together, shall we?
14.陈述部分用上述情况以外的祈使句时，问句部分一般用will you?形式表示请求，用won’t you？形式表示委婉
请求或邀请（即两种情况都可出现，不必遵循前否后肯或前肯后否的原则）。如：
①Do sit down, won’t you?/ will you? ②You feed the bird today, will you?
③Please open the window, will you?(won’t you?)
15.陈述部分为否定祈使句时，问句部分一般用will you?形式。如：Don’t make any noise, will you?
16.陈述部分为There (Here) + be + 主语时，问句部分用be+there(here)?形式。如：
①There are two cakes on the plate, aren’t there?
Here is a story about Mark Twain, isn’t here?
17.陈述部分用had better +原形动词表示建议时，问句部分用hadn’t +主语？形式。
①You’d better tell him about the matter, hadn’t you?②We had better do it by ourselves, hadn’t we?
18.陈述部分用used to +主语时，问句部分用didn’t + 主语？或usedn’t +主语？形式。
①He used to live in the country, didn’t he?/usedn’t he?
②They used to be good friends, didn’t they?/usedn’t they?
19.陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed 表示推测时，若句中带有明显的过去时间的状语，问句部分动词用
过去时形式。如：
①He might have forgotten his pen in the classroom yesterday, didn’t he? （不用mightn’t he?/ hasn’t
he?）
②You must have got up late this morning, didn’t you?（不用mustn’t you?/haven’t you?）
20.陈述部分用must(may, might) + have + V-ed 表示推测时，若句中没有带明显的过去时间的状语，问句部分动词
用现在完成时形式。如：
①Everyone must have known the death of the waitress, haven’t they? （不用mustn’t they?）
②You must have worked there a year ago, didn’t you?（不用mustn’t you?/ haven’t you?）
21.陈述部分的主语为从句时，问句部分的主语一般用it 代替，如：
①What he said is true, isn't it? （不用didn’t he?）
②Where we will build the dam has not been decided yet, has it? （不用won’t we?）
22.陈述部分的主语为动名词或不定式时，问句的主语用it 代替。如：
①To do one good deed is easy for a person, isn't it?②Skating is your favorite sport, isn't it?
23.陈述部分的主语是不定代词one，反义疑问句的主语可以用one，也可以用you。如：One should be ready to help
others, shuldn’t one?
反意疑问句专题练习
1.I think they will go to town tomorrow, ________? A.do I B.don’t
I C.will they D.won’t they
2.I don’t believe he can catch up with me, _________? A.can he B.can’t
he C.do I D.don’t I
3.I’m sure that I will be well again, __________? A.am I B.aren’t I C.will
I D.won’t I
4.I am afraid that he will not come, _______? A.am I B.aren’t I C.will he D.won’t he
5.They don’t believe you are wrong, _________? A.are you B.aren’t you C.do
104
they D.don’t they
6.He thought you were Beijing, _________? A.didn’t he B.did he C.weren’t
you D.were you
7.We told you that he would come tonight, _______? A.didn’t we B.did we C.would
he D.wouldn’t he
8.The reporter said the news was not true, _________? A.wasn’t it B.didn’t he C.did
he D.was it
9.They suggested that he should go to work at once, ________? A.did they B.didn’t
they C.should he D.shouldn’t he
10.Your brother has lunch at home, _________-? A.hasn’t he B.doesn’t he C.has
he D.does he
11.John has to get up early, ________? A.has he B.hasn’t he C.does he D.doesn’t he
12.She has got to get everything ready, _________? A.hasn’t she B.has she C.doesn’t
she D.does she
13.She has never been to China, _________?A.has she B.hasn’t she C.doesn’t she D.does she
14.She had better tell you the news right now, _______?A.had she B.hadn’t she C.did
she D.didn’t she
15.They would rather not have done that last week,________? A.would they B.wouldn’t they C.have
they D.haven’t they
16.I’d rather stay here for a rest, ________?A.did I B.would I C.didn’t I D.wouldn’t I
17.You ought to do it again,_________?A.ought you B.oughtn’t you C.do you D.don’t you
18.You must do that again,_________?A.mustn’t you B.needn’t you C.do you D.don’t you
19.He must wait here, __________?A.mustn’t he B.doesn’t he C.shouldn’t he D.does he
20.He must be a good worker,________?A.mustn’t he B.needn’t he C.isn’t he D.doesn’t he
21.He
must
have
been
to
China
twice,_________?
A.hasn’t
he
B.didn’t
he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
22.He
must
have
been
ill
last
week,__________?
A.hasn’t
he
B.didn’t
he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
23.He must have known you during the war,__________? A.hasn’t he B.didn’t
he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
24.He
must
have
known
the
result
already,_________?
A.hasn’t he
B.didn’t
he C.wasn’t he D.mustn’t he
25.There used to be a temple here,________? A.didn’t there B.did there C.used
there D.was there
26.They used to be good friends,________? A.usedn’t they B.didn’t they C.used
they D.both A and B
27.Mother usedn’t to dress the baby,______? A.didn’t she B.did she C.used
she D.usedn’t she
28.The students used to go to see him,_______? A.usedn’t they B.didn’t they C.used
they D.both A and B
29.Alice, you have a little more chicken,________? A.haven’t you B.don’t you C.will
you D.do you
30.Hi! Alice, you have bought a little chicken,_________? A.haven’t you B.won’t
you C.will you D.have you
31.You two had breakfast just now,__________? A.hadn’t you B.didn’t you C.had
you D.did you
105
32.You two had finished the breakfast,_________? A.hadn’t you B.didn’t you C.did
you D.had you
33.Neither you nor I was invited to the party,________? A.were we B.weren’t
we C.was I D.were you
34.Either he or she is to clean the window,__________?A.are they B.aren’t
they C.isn’t he D.isn’t she
35.It is Jiao Yulu who turned Lankao into a rich district,_______? A.is it B.isn’t
it C.did he D.didn’t he
36.It was you who never made such mistakes,________? A.wasn’t it B.weren’t you C.did
you D.didn’t you
37.The
little
child
dared
not
climb
the
tree,________?
A.dared
he
B.did
he C.was he D.does he
38.What he said is not wrong,__________? A.didn’t he B.did he C.is it D.isn’t it
39.That his parents were ill made him a little worried,_________? A.weren’t they B.were
they C.didn’t it D.wasn’t it
40.He dislikes what you have said,__________?A.does he B.doesn’t he C.have you D.haven’t you
41.(2003Shanghai spring)If you want help—money or anything,let me know,____you?
A.don’t B.will C.shall D.do
42.(2002Shanghai)Mrs. Black doesn’t believe her son is able to design a digital cameral,____?
A.is he B.isn’t he C.doesn’t she D.does she
43.(2002Shanghai spring)Brian told you that there wasn’t anyone in the room at that time,___?
A.was there B.wasn’t there C.didn’t he D.did he
44.(2001Shanghai)I don’t suppose anyone will volunteer,_____? A.do I B.don’t
I C.will they D.won’t they
45.(2000Shanghai)The news that they fialed their driving test discouraged him,___?
A.did they B.didn’t they C.did it D.didn’t it
46.(NMET99)—Alice,you feed the bird today,____? --But I fed it yesterday.
A.do you B.will you C.didn’t you D.don’t you
▲选择疑问句：提出两种或两种以上情况,需要对方作出选择回答的疑问句叫选择疑问句。
1) 构成：(1) 一般疑问句 + or + 第二选项？
(2) 特殊疑问句 + 第一选项(+ 第二选项)+ or + 第三选项？
2)选择疑问句的结构与特殊疑问句相同,即要具体回答,不可以用yes / no 回答。如：
Is your friend a boy or a girl? –A girl. (----你的朋友是男孩还是女孩？----是女孩。) / Which do you prefer, coffee
or tea? –Tea, please. (---你要哪一样咖啡还是茶？----请来茶吧。) / Which do you like best, singing, dancing or
skating? --Dancing, of course. (----唱歌、跳舞和溜冰你最喜欢哪样？----当然是跳舞啦！)
5、祈使句：祈使句用来表示请求、命令等。它的主语you 往往不说出。
▲祈使句的肯定式： 动词(原形) + 其他 如：Please give me a hand. (请帮忙) / Shut up! (住嘴！)
▲祈使句的否定式： Don’t +动词原形 + 其他 如：Please don’t talk in low voices. (请不要低声讲话。) / Don’t look
back! (不要掉头看。)
[注意] 以“let’s”引出的祈使句的否定结构,“not”应放在“let’s”后面。如：Let’s not trouble him. (我们不要打扰
他。)
肯定祈使句前可以用助动词来加强语气。如：Please do help me! (请千万帮帮我。)
6、感叹句：感叹句用来表示喜怒哀乐等强烈感情。句末常用“！”
▲对含有形容词的名词短语感叹的结构通常是：
106
What + (a /an) + (形容词) +名词+ 陈述句结构(主谓语) ,用来强调句子中的名词,如：What a good, kind girl (she is)!
(她是多么善良的好女孩！) / What bad weather (it is)! (天气真糟糕！)
▲仅对形容词或副词进行感叹的结构通常是：How + 形容词/副词 + 陈述句结构(主谓语) ,用来强调句子中的形容
词、副词或动词。How carefully the old man walks! (这老人走路真小心！) / How delicious the food is! (这食品真
好吃！) / How beautiful! (真美呀！)
▲有时,陈述句、祈使句、疑问句、一个词或词组,也带有一定的感情色彩,也可以成为感叹句,此时未必使用感叹句
型。He is sitting on a tiger’s back! (他坐在老虎的背上！) / A nice shot! (漂亮一击！) / Good goal! (好球！)
十一、句子成分：主语、谓语、宾语、表语、定语、宾语补足语和状语
1、主语：
(1)由名词、代词(人称代词用主格)、动词不定式、动名词等充当,说明动作是“谁”发出的，主语是句子陈述的对
象，说明是谁或什么，表示句子说的是“什么人”，或”什么事“，如“我写字”中的“我”，做出写字这个动作。
“写”则是谓语，“字”是宾语，是接受谓语“写”这个动作的对象，因此是宾语。如：The painter painted a very
nice picture. (画家画了一幅漂亮的画。) / They fought against SARS bravely. (他们勇敢地与非典搏斗。) / To see is
to believe. (耳听为虚眼见为实). / Helping animals is to help people. (帮助动物就是帮助人类。)
(2)动词不定式或动名词做主语时可用it 代替,而不定式或动名词移至表语或宾语之后。如：It is very comfortable to
have a Class A seat during the long journey. (在长途旅行中能有个甲等座位简直太舒服了。) / Eating too much is
bad for your health.(=It is bad for your health eating too much.) (吃得太多对你的身体不利。)（比较好看，避免头
重脚轻）
(3)口语中常见主语或“主--系”省略：(It is) nothing. ((那)没有什么。)/ (It) doesn’t matter. ((那)没有关系。) / (I) thank
you. ((我)谢谢你。)
(4)反意问句的附加问句,主语必须是代词：The man looks worried, doesn’t he? (这个人看上去很着急不是吗？) /
Tigers are dangerous animals, aren’t they? (老虎是危险的动物不是吗？)
(5)祈使句一般省略主语。加主语时往往用来指定某个人。Keep the keyboards clean, children. (孩子们请保持键盘的
清洁。) (省略了主语) / You go there and fetch me a glass of water. (你去给我弄一杯水来。)
(6)主语一般在句首,但在问句中会处于第二位和句尾；倒装句及there be 句型主语在动词之后。如：Computers are
made in this factory. (计算机生产于这家工厂。) / Where are they? (他们在哪儿？) / Does the boy like staying home?
(这个男孩喜欢呆在家里吗？)
(7)主语与谓语必须保持单、复数的一致, 而谓语与表语或宾语之间没有这一要求。Neither Jim nor Rose has passed
the exam. (Jim 和Rose 都没有通过考试。) / The Chinese people are a hardworking and brave people. (中华民族是
一个勤劳勇敢的民族。)
(8)主语可以由从句充当,详见“主语从句”。
2、谓语：是对主语动作或状态的陈述或说明，指出“做什么”，“是什么”或“怎么样”，在主语后接宾语，又称受词，
是一个动作的接受者。
(1)由“不及物动词”、“及物动词+宾语”或“系动词+表语”等构成,说明主语所表示的人物“干什么”或“怎么样”。
如：
He travelled in space for the first time .(他首次在太空旅行。) / Who teaches you English this year?(今年谁教你们的
英语？) / The pizza has gone bad. (那块烤馅饼已经变坏。) /
(2)谓语动词必须反映出人称、单复数、时态等信息,谓语动词往往由下列词语依序排列构成：［情态动词］+［时
态助动词］（现在完成时）+［语态助动词］（如被动语态）+［主要动词］(不一定全部出现)。(见动词的时态
和语态构成表) 记住：谓语部分第一个动词往往是变形动词。如：
I am sorry I am making so much noise but I have to. (对不起我发出了太大的声音但是只能这样。) / He can’t
have finished reading the 800-page-long novel. (他不可能读完了那本长达800 页的小说。) / Something must be
done to stop the fowl flu from spreading out. (该采取措施防止禽流感蔓延。)
(3)谓语动词切忌用“行为动词1 + 原形动词”、“be + 原形动词”。
记住使用下列正确形式：
①情态动词+原形动词。如：You’d better go over the lesson.（你最好复习这一课。）
②shall/ will/ would+原形动词。如：They should have been there once.（他们应该去过那儿。）
③be+现在分词或者过去分词。如：What are you doing this evening?（今晚你打算做什么？）---表示一般将来时
/ Many trees have been cut down since 1970s.（自从20世纪70年代大批树木被砍伐。）
107
④have+过去分词。如：Many trees have been cut down since 1970s.（意思同上）
⑤一般时问句和否定句中：do/does/did+原形动词。如：He does not enjoy himself very much.（他日子过的不好。）
/ Did any of you see dinosaur eggs?（你们当中有谁见过恐龙蛋吗？）
⑥行为动词1+行为动词2 (不定式、动名词、现在分词、过去分词等形式)。如：He made up his mind to be a vet.
（他拿定主意要做个兽医。）/ Feeling good about yourself is essential to feeling good about life.（自尊自爱是享
受生活的根本。）/ They wake up the other family members, calling,“Merry Christmas!”（他们叫醒家庭的其他
成员,呼喊着：圣诞快乐！）/ The kings of ancient Egypt had strong tombs built for themselves.（古代的埃及国王
让人给他们自己修建坚固的坟墓。）
(4)不可用形容词、名词、代词、副词、介词短语等独立作谓语,必须在此之前加连系动词。
(5)谓语动词单复数形式：单数形式的动词有：is,was,has,does以及“动词+s”；复数形式的动词有：are,were,have
以及动词原形。其他动词不分单、复数。
谓语部分第一个动词的形式
单数形式
复数形式
一般现在时be(是)动词；
现在某些时态和语态的助动词be
am (单一); are (单二);
is (单三);
are
一般过去时be(是)动词；
过去某些时态和语态的助动词be
was (单一); were (单二);
was;(单三)
were
一般现在时have(有)动词；
现在完成时态的助动词have
have (单一); have (单二);
has (单三);
have
一般现在时行为动词和助动词do
do (单一、单二); does (单三)
do
实意动词和连系动词的一般现在
时动词（否定和疑问句除外）
原形动词(单一、单二);
动词+s /es (单三)
原形动词
其他各时态语态的谓语动词
单复数形式相同
记住：主语、谓语单复数必须保持一致。（参见“4、名词或代词作主语时和谓语之间的单复数的一致问题：”）
Air and water is necessary to us all.(空气和水对于我们大家是必不可少的。)
(6)一般问句和反意问句的回答不使用行为动词,应该使用“是”动词、情态动词、助动词(be,will,have,do以及变形)。
如：The Olympic Games is held every other year, isn’t it? ----Yes, it is.(奥运会每两年举办一次,是吗？----是的。)
3、宾语：又称受词，是指一个动作（动词）的接受者。宾语分为直接宾语和间接宾语两大类，其中直接宾语（经常指
被做的人）指动作的直接对象，间接宾语说明动作的非直接，但受动作影响的对象。一般而言，及物动词后面最少要
有一个宾语，而该宾语通常为直接宾语，有些及物动词要求两个宾语，则这两个宾语通常一个为直接宾语，另一个为
间接宾语。
(1) 由名词、代词(人称代词要用宾格)、不定式、动名词、(宾语)从句充当,表示动作的承受者是“谁”或者是“何物”。
如： The angel also came to Joseph and told him the same thing.(那个天使同样来到约瑟夫面前并且告诉他同样的
事情。)(代词和名词充当两个宾语) / He told me that the company could not afford to pay him so much money.(他告
诉我说公司付不起他那么多的钱。) (不定式作宾语) / They enjoy watching football games so much that they often
forget their lessons. (他们如此喜爱看足球以至于常常忘记了他们的功课。) (动名词作宾语) / I think to be a
children’s doctor is very rewarding.(我认为当个儿童医生是很值得的。) (从句作宾语)
(2) 只有及物动词或介词才有宾语,不及物动词没有宾语,如果涉及到事物,则必须在不及物动词后面加合适的介词。
Listen to the radio. (listen 不是及物动词,故加to。) / Can you hear anything exciting?(你能听到什么令人兴奋的消
息吗？)
(3) 宾语一般放在及物动词或介词的后面,但是在疑问句中,如果宾语是疑问词,则宾语要放在句首。介词的宾语如果是
疑问词,则可以放在介词后或句首。如：What did he see? (他看见了什么？) / What does he write a letter with? (他
用什么写的信？) / With what does he write a letter? (他用什么写的信？)
(4)“动词+副词+宾语”结构中,如果宾语是代词,则代词必须放在“动”“副”之间。如：Please put the shoes away. (请
把鞋子收起来。) / Please put away the shoes. (请把鞋子收起来。) / Please put them away. (请把它们收起来。)
(5) 动词后面跟双宾语时可以采用两种结构：
①动词+间接宾语(人)+直接宾语(物)。如：He often gives me some help. (他常常帮我。)
②动词+直接宾语+介词+间接宾语。注意,一般情况介词用to,但动词是make, buy, borrow 时,介词用for.如： Please
make me a kite. (请给我做个风筝。)或Please make a kite for me.
(6) 在“动词+宾语+宾补”结构中,如果宾语是不定式、动名词、宾语从句,则常用it 做形式宾语,而将实际的宾语移到
补语后面去。如：I found the job rather difficult. (我发觉这个工作相当难做。) / I found it rather difficult to do the
job.
108
(7) 宾语可以由从句充当,详见“宾语从句”。
4、表语：
(1) 说明主语的身份、性质、状况等含义的成分,通常由形容词、副词、介词短语、名词、代词等充当。如：He became
a doctor after he left high school.(高中毕业他当上了医生。) / The rubber wheels are over there.(橡胶轮子在那边。)
/ He does not feel like eating anything today because he has caught a bad cold.(他今天不想吃任何东西因为他得了
重感冒。) / Who is it?(谁呀？)
(2) 表语只能放在连系动词(如：be,look,become,turn get,grow,feel,seem) 之后,对表语进行提问的句子除外。
(3) 代词做表语一般用主格,口语中常用宾。如：It’s I. (It’s me.)是我。
(4) 只能作表语的形容词有：sorry,afraid,alone,asleep,awake,ill,well,sure,interested 等等。He was terribly sorry for his
carelessness.(他很为他的粗心而歉疚。) / Please make no noise here; the baby is asleep.(请不要发出响动,婴儿正熟
睡呢。) / I am only interested in sitting in a boat and doing nothing at all!(我只是对独坐孤舟无所事事感兴趣。) / I
am not alone in thinking so.(并非只有我才这样想的。)
(5) 表语也可以由从句充当,详见“表语从句”。
5、定语：
(1) 修饰名词或代词的成分,常由形容词、名词(含所有格)、代词(物主、指示、疑问、不定)、介词短语、不定式(短
语)充当,在初三阶段还学习了定语从句做定语的知识。如：Put it in the top drawer.(把它放在最上层的抽屉里。) /
France and Switzerland are European countries. (法国和瑞士是欧洲国家。) / His mother and father are both college
teachers.(他的父母都是大学教师。) / This is the day that I can never forget in my life.(这是我一辈子难忘的日子。)
(2) 单词做定语时一般放在被修饰的名词前面,而且有一定的次序：
冠词/
物代
年龄/形状/
大小/温度
色彩
来源
质地/
材料
目的/
用途
被修饰的名
词(中心词)
a
the
my
his
…
old,young,…
red,
yellow,
blue,
…
Chinese,
English,
American,
…
wooden,
woolen,
glass,
silk,
paper
…
meeting,
tennis,
sports,
reading,
swimming,
…
box,
shoes,
room,
pig
…
long,short,
round, square…
big, large,
small, little…
hot, cold,
warm, cool…
(3) 时间副词(now,then,today,yesterday,...)、地点副词(here,there,back,in,out,home,...作定语时放在被修饰的名词后面。
如：I could not find my way out, so I stayed there all along. (我找不到出去的路,所以就一直呆在那儿。)
(4) 介词短语修饰名词时只能放在名词的后面：The monkey in the cage was caught yesterday. (笼子里的猴子是昨天逮
着的。)
(5) 形容词修饰复合不定代词时,往往后置。如：He remembered everything unusual. (他记得所有不寻常的事情。)
(6) 定语还可以用从句充当,详见 定语从句。
(7) 注意：由于定语属于修饰性的成分,因此它常归入主语、宾语、表语之中,不作为句子的主要成分。
6、状语：
(1) 说明动作“何时”、“何地”、“如何”发生,或者说明形容词或副词的程度,一般由副词、介词短语、不定式、状
语从句等充当。如：I was not born yesterday.（我又不是昨天才出世的娃娃。）/ For many of these families a college
education was something new.（对其中的许多家庭来说,大学教育是件新事物。）/ He woke up to find his house on
fire.(他醒来发现房子着火了。) / You cannot leave until your work is finished.(在你的工作被完成以前你不能离
109
开)
(2) 副词作状语位置较为灵活,详见《六·2》“副词在句子中的位置以及作用”；介词短语作状语,位置基本固定,详见
《七·4》“介词短语在句子中的位置”；不定式作状语,一般表示目的、结果,详见《八·7》“动词的非谓语形式”；
从句作状语,详见《主从复合句》的“状语从句”。
(3) 多个状语相连时,一般先单词、后短语,先地点、后时间,先小概念、后大概念。如：He went ouf of the room at a
quarter to 23:00 last night and then disappeared into the dark.(他昨夜22 点3 刻从房间里出来,然后消失在黑暗之
中。) /
(4) 状语还可以用从句来充当,有时间状语从句、地点状语从句、原因状语从句、目的状语从句、结果状语从句、比
较状语从句、让步状语从句、条件状语从句等。详见“状语从句”。
(5) 注意：由于状语属于修饰性的成分,常归入谓语,因此不作为句子的主要成分。
7、宾语补足语：
(1) 补充说明宾语的动作、状态的成分为宾语补足语,常由名词、形容词、动词非谓语形式(不定式、现在分词、过去
分词等)、介词短语等充当。如：Call him Jim, please. (请叫他Jim。) / I tried my best to make him happy. (我竭
尽所能让他开心。) / Ask her to come to dinner tomorrow. (请他明天来。) / He let the smaller animals bring food to
him. (他让小动物们给他带食物来。)
(2) 部分表示位置、方向的副词也可以作宾语补足语。如：Let him in, I tell you! (我跟你说,让他进来！)/ Please put it
away. (请把它收起来。)
(3) 不定式或分词作宾语补足语的情况,详见《八·7》“动词的非谓语形式”相关内容。
十二、简单句五种基本句型：
句子包含主要句子成分(主语、谓语)和次要句子成分(表语、宾语、宾语补足语),按照动词的性质将英语简单句划分
为以下五种基本句型：
1、基本句型的词序： 2、划分符号(没有统一规定,仅供参考)：
3、例句：Jim is working [very hard] [now].（他现在正非常努力地工作。）
She is young. （她年轻。） It looks like rain. （天看上去要下雨。）
The boy [always] kicked the dog [with his feet]. （这男孩老是用脚踢那只狗。）
He has [never] bought me a toy [since last year]. （从去年起他没给我买过一个玩具。）
He felt something (cold) <moving up his leg>.（他感到有个冰冷的东西顺着腿上爬。）
4、英语词类与句子成分关系图：
句子成分
词类或短语
主语*
谓语
宾语*
表语*
定语*
状语*
宾语
补足语
名词
√√√
×
√√√
√√
√
×
√
代词
√√√
×
√√√
√√
√√
×
×
形容词
×
×
×
√√√
√√√
×
√√
数词
√
×
√
√
√√√
×
√
动
词
时态语态形式
×
√√√
×
×
×
×
×
动词不定式
√√
×
√√
√
√
√√
√√√
动名词
√√
×
√√√
√
√
×
×
动词现在分词
×
×
×
√
√
√√
√√√
动词过去分词
×
×
×
√
√
√√
√√
主谓句型：S－Vi。
主系表句型：S－Vlink－P
主谓宾句型：S－Vt.－O
主谓双宾句型：S－Vt－O
间宾－O
直宾
主谓宾补句型：S－Vt－O－C
主语： 定语：( )
谓语： 状语：[ ]
宾语： 宾补：〈 〉
表语：
110
副词
×
×
×
√
√
√√√
√
介词短语
×
×
×
√√
√
√√
√
[注释] 1、“√”表示某种词类可以充当某个成分, “√√”表示某种词类经常充当某个成分, “√√√”表示某种词类
最经常充当某个成分。 “×”表示某种词类不能充当某个成分。
2、“ * ”表示该成分可以由从句充当,如主语从句、宾语从句、状语从句等。
十三、并列复合句
1、基本概念：
并列复合句是由两个或两个以上并列而又独立的简单句构成。两个简单句常由并列连接词连在一起；但有时
不用连接词,只在两个简单句之间用一逗号或分号。
2、常见的并列句：
(1) 用来连接两个并列概念的连接词有and , not only…but also…, neither…nor…等,and 所连接的前后分句往往
表示先后关系、递进关系。前后分句的时态往往保持一致关系,若第一个分句是祈使句,那么第二个分句用将来
时。
(2) 表示在两者之间选择一个, 常用的连接词有or,otherwise,or else,either…or…等,前后分句的时态往往保持一致
关系,若第一个分句是祈使句,那么第二个分句用将来时。
(3) 表明两个概念彼此有矛盾、相反或者转折, 常用的连接词有but,yet,still ,however 等,前后分句时态一致。
(4) 说明原因, 用连接词for ,前后分句时态一致。
(5) 表示结果,用连接词so, 前后分句时态一致。
十四、主从复合句
1、概念：
主从复合句由一个主句和一个或一个以上的从句构成。主句为句子的主体,从句只用作句子的一个次要成分,不能
独立成为一个句子。从句通常由关联词引导,并由关联词将从句和主句联系在一起。如：While the grandparents
love the children, they are strict with them.(爷爷奶奶们很爱孩子,同时对他们也严格要求。) / It seemed as if the
meeting would never end.(看起来会议没完没了。) / Hurry up, or (else) you'll be late.(快点, 要不然就来不及了。) /
However I cook eggs, the child still refuses to eat them.(不管我用什么方法煮鸡蛋,小孩还是不肯吃。)
2、分类：
从句按其在复合句中的作用,分为主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句、定语从句和状语从句等。（参见以下各条）
3、各从句在句子中的位置以及用法：
(1) 表语从句：在句子中作连系动词的表语的从句,它位于主句中的系动词之后。
例如：That is why he did not come to school yesterday. / It is because you are so clever.
(2) 宾语从句：在句子中作及物动词或介词的宾语。
①基本形式：（主句＋）连词+从句主语+从句谓语+...
② 关于宾语从句连词的选择：
若从句来源于一个陈述句,那么,连词用that,在口语中that 可以省略;
若从句来源于一个一般疑问句,连词则用if 或whether;
若从句来源于一个特殊疑问句,则连词就是疑问词(如what,who,where,when 等)
例如：They believe that the computer will finally take the place of human beings.(他们相信计算机终将代替人
类。) (从句本来就是陈述句)/ I wonder whether I should say something for him to the headmaster. (我不知道
是不是该为他在校长跟前说点什么。) (从句来源于一般问句Shall I say something for him to the
headmaster?) / He asked me where he could get such medicine. (他问我在哪儿能搞到那样的药。) (从句来源
于特殊问句Where can he get such medicine? )
③ 宾语从句的时态问题：如果主句是现在时,从句则用现在某一时态,甚至可以用过去时；
如主句是过去时,从句则相应地使用过去某一时态,遇到客观真理时仍然用现在时。如：I think I will do
better in English this term. (我想本学期我的英语会学得好点。) / The teacher asked the boy if the earth is
round. (老师问那个男孩地球是不是圆的。)
④ 下列结构后面的从句一般也作为宾语从句看待：
be sorry / afraid / sure / glad +that 从句,如：I’m sorry I’m late. (对不起,我迟到了。) / I’m afraid he isn’t
in at the moment. (恐怕他此刻不在家。)
(3) 状语从句：在复合句中作状语,其位置可以在主句前或主句后。状语从句可以分为时间、地点、原因、目的、
结果、比较、让步、条件等几种。状语从句由从属连接词引导。
时间状语从句通常由when ,as ,while, after, before, since, as soon as ,since, till (until), while, whenever 等引导。
111
时间状语从句一般放在句首或句尾,特别注意,时间状语从句不允许使用将来时,而应该用现在时替代。如：
When you finish the work, you may go out to play with Sam. (你完成工作就可以出去和Jim 一起玩了。) / I
won’t leave until Mum comes back. (妈妈回来了我才会走。)
地点状语从句通常由 where, wherever 等引导。如：Go back where you came from! (哪里来还滚到哪里去！) / I will
never forget to catch the thief who stole my necklace wherever he may be. (我永远也不会忘记去抓住那个偷
我项链的贼,无论他会在哪里。)
原因状语从句通常由because, since, as 等引导,一般放在句首或句尾。如：He went abroad because his father had
found a good university for him. (他出国了,因为他父亲给他找了一所好大学。)
目的状语从句通常由so that..., so...hat..., in order that... 等引导,往往放在句尾,从句中通常含有can / could /
may / might 等情态动词。如：He got up earlier so that he could catch the first train. (他起身更早为的是赶
上第一班车。)
结果状语从句通常由 so that..., so...that... 等引导,放在句尾。结果状语从句一般表示已经发生的事情,故多为过
去时态。如：He lost so many bikes that he decided never to buy a new one. (他丢了那么多辆自行车,他决定
再也不买新车了。)
比较状语从句通常由as, than, as (so)...as 等引导,一般省略从句的谓语部分,只剩下名词或代词(用主格或宾格
均可)。如：Jane is much taller than I/me. (Jane 比我高多了。) / I don’t have as many books as you (do). (我
书没有你多)
让步状语从句通常由though (although), as, even if( even though), however, whatever 等引导。如：Even if you pay
the debt(债务) for me, I will not thank you because it has nothing to do with me. (即使你替我还了债我也不
会感谢你,因为它与我毫无关系。) / He wears a T-shirt though it is very cold. (他穿了一件T 恤衫,尽管天很
冷。)
条件状语从句通常由if, unless, as long as 等引导,条件状语从句一般放在句首或句尾,特别注意,时间状语从句
不允许使用将来时,而应该用现在时替代。You will certainly fail in the coming final exams unless you work
much harder. (即将来到的期末考试你肯定考不及格,除非你更用功。) / If it doesn’ t rain tomorrow, we shall
go hiking. (如果明天不下雨我们就要去徒步旅行。)
[注意] 1、because 与so；(al)though 与but；if 与so 不可以同在一个句子中成对出现。
2、时间、条件、原因,让步状语从句放在句首时需要用逗号与主句隔开。
(4) 定语从句：在复合句中作定语用修饰句子中某一名词或代词的从句叫定语从句。
① 定语从句的位置：放在名词或代词的后面。如：The man who has an umbrella in his hand is my uncle. (手
上抓了一把雨伞的人是我的叔叔。)
② 语法术语的改变：被修饰的名词或代词称为先行词；引导定语从句的连接词称为关系词,其中that、which、
who 称为关系代词,where、when、how 称为关系副词。
③ 关系代词或关系副词的作用：
关系代词who、whom 和whose 指人,分别在从句中作主语、宾语和定语。which 指物that 多指物, 有时也
指人,它们在从句中可以作主语或宾语。定语从句中关系代词作从句宾语时可以省略。This is the thief
(that/who/whom) we have been looking for these days. (这个就是我们近日一直在找的小偷。) / Please find a
room which is big enough for all of us to live in. (请找一间足够大能住下我们全体的房间。)
关系副词when 或where 引导定语从句时,它们在从句中分别作时间状语和地点状语。如：This is the room
where they had a quarrel a week ago. (这是一个星期前他们吵架的房间。) / I can never forget the day when I
first saw you. (我永远不会忘记第一次见到你的日子。)
④ 限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句。限制性定语从句在句中不能省略,否则主句意思就不完整。非限制
性定语从句和主句之间往往用逗号分开,这种从句是一种附加说明,如果从句子中省去,也不致于影响主句
的意思。如：She spent the whole evening talking about her latest book, which none of us had heard of. (她一
个晚上都在谈论她最近的书,我们一个人都没有听说过那本书。)
[注解]
1、关系代词只能用that 的情况：当先行词是指事物的不定代词(all, anything 等),或先行词部分含有最高级,或
含有序数词时,不能用其他的关系代词,只能用that. 如：All that Lily told me seems untrue. (Lily 告诉我的话
似乎不真实。) / Can you give me anything that has no sugar inside? (能不能给我点里面没有糖的东西？) /
This is the first two-story bus that runs in our city. (这是第一辆运行于我市的双层公交车。)
2、关系代词在从句中作主语时一般用who(指人)、that(指物),而不用that 指人或用which 指物。 如：Do you know
the woman who is weeping in the corner? (你认识那个在角落里哭泣的女人吗？) / Do not tell me any words
that have nothing to do with me. (跟我无关的话,请一个字也不要说。)
112
this
these
now
ago
today
this week(month,etc.)
next week ( month,etc.)
yesterday
tomorrow
here
that
those
then
before
that day
that week ( month,etc.)
the next week ( month,etc.)
the day before
the next (following) day
there
3、关系代词作从句的宾语时,常用which 或whom,较少使用that 或who,而且,关系代词常常省略。如：Tom’s father
was the first parent whom our teacher talked to. (Tom 的父亲是我们老师第一个谈话的人。)
4、当关系代词紧跟在介词后面时,必须用which 或whom,而当介词移到句尾时,则又可以使用that 或who. 如：
This is the room in which Miss Li once lived. (= This is the room
Miss Li once lived in.) (这是李小姐曾经居
住过的房间。)
(5) 主语从句：在句子中充当句子主语的从句叫主语从句。位于谓语动词之前。通常由that,whether 以及疑问连
词引导。一般情况下,常用it 替代主语从句,而将主语从句移到句尾。如：When we should start is still a question.
(我们该在什么时候开始还是个问题呢。)
十五、直接引语和间接引语(初中不作特别要求)
1、直接引语和间接引语：在陈述句中,直接引用说话人原来的语句,称为直接引语。在书写时,直接引语用引号。用自己
的词语来转述表达原来说话人说的内容,称为间接引语。
2、直接引语改变为间接引语：
1、直接引语如果是陈述句,变为间接引语时应注意以下各点：
①不用引号,而用连接词that,但有时可省略。
②人称作相应变化；
③主句里的动词如果是过去时,间接引语中的时态一般应作相应改变： 一般现在时变一般过去时；一般将来时变
过去将来时；现在进行时变过去进行时；现在完成时变成过去完成时；一般过去时变成过去完成时；但一般
过去时如与一个具体的过去时间连用,则时态不变。
如：He says,"I am not from the USA.”→He says that he is not from the USA.
Mr Smith said to his girl friend,“ I haven’ t seen you for a long time.”
→Mr Smith said to his girl friend that he had not seen her for a long time.
2、直接引语如果是一般疑问句,变为间接引语时,需用从属连接词whether 或if 引导,词序要改变。如：Lin Tao said
to Miss Green, "Is it made in China?” →Lin Tao asked Miss Green if it was made in China.
3、直接引语如果是特殊疑问句,变为间接引语时,需用疑问词引导,词序是：连词+主语+谓语。
如：Lucy said to me, “How can I help?” →Lucy asked me how she could help.
4、直接引语如是祈使句,变间接引语时,须将祈使句变为动词不定式,并在动词不定式前用tell, ask, order. 如：He said
to the little boy,“ Come here, young man! ”
→He asked the little boy to go there.
5、直接引语变为间接引语时,指示代词以及表示时间和地点的词或词组应作相应变化：
在直接引语中 在间接引语中
十六、倒装句： 谓语的一部分或者全部放在主语之前的句子称为倒装句。
1、THERE BE 句型以及以here、there 开头的句子。如： There are a lot of children in the showroom. (在展览室里有许
多的小孩。)/ Here comes the bus. (公交车来了。) / There goes the bell. (铃响了。) / The door opened and in came Mr Lee.
(门开了,李先生走了进来。)
2、用“So / Nor / Neither + 助动词 + 主语”倒装结构表示第二个人物的情况与上文的人物情况相同。如：Tom went to
the beach last week, and, so did I. (Tom 上个星期去了海滩,我也是。) / Li Mei’s bought nothing from the shop. Neither
113
has Jim. (李梅没有在店里买什么,Jim 也没有买。)
3、在疑问句中,通常使用在主语之前安放助动词倒装方法,对主语提问除外。如：How did he find the lost book? (他是怎
么样找到丢失的书的？) / Where are they going to spend the summer vacation? (他们打算到哪儿过暑假？)
4、感叹句中通常将被感叹的部分前移,而将句子的主谓语整体后置。 如：What a beautiful flower (it is)! (那是多漂亮的
花！)
5、有引号引用某人的原话时,引号外面的主谓一般采用倒装形式放在句尾,但是,若主语是代词则不倒装。如：“What on
earth are you doing up there?” said the father. (父亲说：
“你在上边到底干什么？”) / “What on earth are you doing up
there?”he said. (他说：“你在上边到底干什么？”)
十七、附加注释
die、dead、death 的用法：die 是动词,可以独立做谓语,有各种时态变化,也可以变成非谓语形式作句子的其他成分；dead
是形容词,作句子的定语、表语或宾语补足语；death 是名词,作句子主语、宾语等。如：I’m going to die! (我要死了！)
/ The man has been dead for about three months. (那个人死了三个月左右。) / He is worried to death. (他急得要死。)
3
